How to Use S20 Tools

From TrainzOnline
(Difference between revisions)
Jump to: navigation, search
m (Ground Texture)
m (Ground Texture)
 
Line 2,027: Line 2,027:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
<td>All ground texture edits must be performed using either the [[image:S20_BrushToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Brush Tool''' or the [[image:S20_MarqueeToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Marquee Tool'''</td>
+
<td>Ground texture edits are usually performed using either the [[image:S20_BrushToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Brush Tool''' or the [[image:S20_MarqueeToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Marquee Tool'''. Limited ground texture edits under a selected object or objects can be performed using the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint Under Selected&#160;</span> option in the objects '''Context Icon'''.</td>
</tr>
+
<tr valign="top">
+
<td colspan=2>Most ground texture edits are performed using either the [[image:S20_BrushToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Brush Tool''' or the [[image:S20_MarqueeToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]&#160;'''Marquee Tool'''. Limited ground texture edits under a selected object or objects can be performed using the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint Under Selected&#160;</span> option in the objects '''Context Icon'''.</td>
+
 
</tr>
 
</tr>
 
</table>
 
</table>

Latest revision as of 07:44, 25 November 2024

The information in this Wiki Page applies to Surveyor 2.0 (S20) as found in Trainz Plus and TRS22 Platinum.

          Next Down Bottom

Contents

Surveyor 2.0  Mouse  and  Keyboard  Aids and Shortcuts
 Operations 
 LClick   Left Click  on an object to Select it
 Shift   LClick  hold down the Shift key and  Left Click  on another object to add it to the Selection
 LClick   Drag  Left Click and Drag to Move an object or a group of selected objects
 RClick  Right Click on the terrain to Move the Compass Rose and Focus to that location or to open a setting menu in a palette
 DLClick  Double Left Click on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single Selection
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a consist all the wagons in the consist, regardless of type, will be selected
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a spline or track all the segments upto the next junction or last endpoint (in both directions) will be selected
 Shift   DLClick  hold down the Shift key and Double Left Click on another object to add it and its nearby identical objects to those already in the Selection
 Ctrl   LClick   Drag  hold down the Ctrl key and Left Click and Drag to Clone an object or selected objects
 Ctrl   C  press Ctrl + C to Copy selected objects (including the ground heights, ground textures and any TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers) into a new Scrapbook
 Ctrl   D  press Ctrl + D to Unselect a selected object (or ALL objects if multiple objects have been selected). Also removes the boundary lines from a Marquee Selection Area
 Ctrl   E  press Ctrl + E to open the Route Editor (to edit the route name, description, thumbnail, scale, etc)
 Ctrl   F  press Ctrl + F to open the Object Finder
 Ctrl   F1  press Ctrl + F1 to switch from Driver to Surveyor via the UDS interface
 Ctrl   F2  press Ctrl + F2 to switch from Surveyor to Driver via the UDS interface
 Ctrl   M  press Ctrl + M to open the Mini Map
 Ctrl   R  press Ctrl + R to open the Session Editor (to edit the session name, description and rules)
 Ctrl   S  press Ctrl + S to Save the current route and/or session (which ever has been edited)
 Ctrl   V  press Ctrl + V to Paste the current Scrapbook into the route at the cursor position (the Surveyor Compass Rose). The current settings in the  Scrapbook Palette  Filter will control which objects are pasted and how they are pasted
 Ctrl   X  press Ctrl + X to Cut and remove selected objects from the route and place them into a new Scrapbook. The ground heights, ground textures, TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers and any selected objects that are in locked layers will be copied into the Scrapbook, not cut
 Ctrl   Y  press Ctrl + Y to Redo (reverse) the last  Ctrl   Z  command
 Ctrl   Z  press Ctrl + Z to Undo previous actions
 Ctrl   Space  press Ctrl + Space to show/hide the User Interface. The Trainz Main Menu icons and all the docked palettes in the sidebars will be hidden while "free floating" palettes will still be visible and usable
 Alt  hold down the  Alt  key and hover the tool pointer over an object to Identify it
 Alt   LClick  hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on an object to Select it in the  Assets Palette  and to copy some data from the object to the  Tool Options Palette 
 Delete  press the Delete key to Delete a selected object or objects from the route
 Tools 
 W  selects the Brush Tool S20 BrushToolIcon.png ToolsKeyboard S20.png
 E  selects the Placement Tool S20 PlacementToolIcon.png
 R  selects the Eyedropper Tool S20 DropperToolIcon.png
 S  selects the Free Move Tool S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png
 D  selects the Fine Adjustment Tool S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png
 F  selects the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png
 T  opens the Context Menu of a selected object
  Object Context Icons: ContextIconsOneRow S20.png


LinkWiki.PNG Further information on the topics mentioned in the above list can be found in Trainz Wiki Pages at:-
BlackDot10x10.png The Session Editor
BlackDot10x10.png The Route Editor
BlackDot10x10.png The UDS Interface


The Surveyor Tools
ToolsWork S20.png


NotePad.PNG Assets and Objects

(based on the Surveyor 2.0 Overview document)

In this online documentation, the term Asset is used when discussing the items listed in Content Manager and the  Assets Palette . When an asset is placed into the Trainz World then it will be referred to as an Object.


Navigation Icons used in this Document
Top Bottom at Chapter Headings to jump to the top/bottom of the document
Next Up Next Down at Chapter Headings to jump to the next Chapter
e.g. 1. to 2. to 3., etc
Next Up Skip Down within Chapters to jump to the next Section
e.g. 3.1 to 3.2 to 3.3, etc
To Heading within Sections to return to the Chapter Heading
e.g. 3.3 back to 3.0
Up Down within Sections to jump to the next Sub-section
e.g. 3.1.1 to 3.1.2 to 3.1.3, etc


Colour Coded Labels used in this Document
 Palette  Name of a palette e.g.  Assets Palette 
 Option  Drop Down Menu option e.g.  Copy 
 Key  Keystroke or keystroke combination e.g.  Shift  or  Ctrl  +  C 
 Control  A control setting in the  Tool Options Palette  e.g.  Radius 
 Mouse  An action to be performed using the mouse e.g.  Left Click and Drag 


[edit] Surveyor 2.0 vs Surveyor Classic

    Top   Next Down Bottom
Surveyor 2.0
Surveyor 2.0 (or S20) is the new Surveyor interface provided to Trainz Plus and TRS22 Platinum as an alternative to Surveyor Classic which has existed since 2002. Surveyor Classic is still available as an option in Trainz Plus and TRS22 Platinum.
Whats New
BlueDot10x10.png a single set of common tools that can be applied to ALL types of objects
BlueDot10x10.png the ability to select multiple objects of different types that can be manipulated as one with more freedom than was previously possible
BlueDot10x10.png each object has its own Context Menu that applies specific actions depending on the type of object
BlueDot10x10.png information and controls in dockable and moveable Palettes that can be hidden when not needed
BlueDot10x10.png a new Scrapbook asset to store "scenes" that can be pasted anywhere in a route, between routes and shared through the DLS
BlueDot10x10.png a new Marquee Tool that allows:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png multiple baseboards to be added, deleted and have their heights, ground texture and grid sizes changed in a single operation
DotPointBlueSquare.png objects, ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers to be moved and copied
BlueDot10x10.png HD Grid in Trainz Plus
BlueDot10x10.png Color Effect Layer in Trainz Plus routes that use HD Grid


The following screen images help illustrate the change in philosophy that has occurred with the release of the Surveyor 2.0 user interface.

 Surveyor Classic 

2002 - 2022

Surveyor10Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG all the tools are in separate fixed Tabbed Flyouts with a different Flyout and set of tools for each type of object (scenery, track, terrain, textures, trains, etc)
DotPoint.JPG the workflow forces you to select the correct tool for the type of object and then apply it to just a single object at a time


 Surveyor 2.0 

2022 -

Surveyor20Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG there is just one set of tools that can be applied to all types of objects
DotPoint.JPG the workflow allows you to select multiple objects (that can be of different types) and then apply a selected tool or operation to them all


[edit] The Tools Palette

    Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png The  Tools Palette  is at the core of Surveyor 2.0 and takes the place of all the Tool Flyouts that have been the standard for Trainz Surveyor for many years. Some of the tools are new while others have been given a makeover and new abilities.
Tools and keymap for S20


The  Context Tool  is attached as an icon to a selected or newly placed object. The icon design will vary according to the type of object.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Palettes

If the  Tools Palette  is not shown on the screen, then:-

Windows Menu
Steps: To display palettes:-
DotPoint1.JPG open the SurveyorWindowIcon.png Window Menu from the menu icons at the top of the screen
 
BulletTick.png visible palettes have ticks next to their names
BulletNoTick.png invisible (hidden) palettes have no ticks next to their names
DotPoint2.JPG if the  Tools Palette , or any required palette, does not have a tick next to its name then  Left Click  on the name of the palette or on the empty BulletNoTick.png box next to its name. This will add a BulletTick.png and make the palette visible
DotPoint3.JPG make sure that the  Tool Options Palette  is also visible

There is a Trainz Wiki Page specifically covering the S20 Palettes at
WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes


[edit] The Brush Tool

Skip Down   Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 BrushToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  W 
The  Brush Tool  "paints" ground heights, ground textures, effect layers and scrapbook scenes into your Trainz World


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Scrapbook Palette   Tool Options Palette   Info Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool has two drop down menu lists.

Brush Tools
 Brush Targets  The first drop down menu will set the "Brush Target" which is the type of brush.  Left Click  on the drop down box and on a Target to select it. The Brush Targets are:-
BulletTick.png Ground Height
BulletTick.png Ground Texture
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Data
BulletTick.png <List of Effect Layers>
BulletTick.png Edit Effect Layers
BrushToolsGroundOptions S20.png If you have any Effect Layers then they will appear as Targets in this Drop Down Menu. Select an Effect Layer to use the brush to paint with that layer. See PageLink.PNG Effect Layers below for more details
 Brush Actions  The second drop down menu will set the "Brush Action" which is how the brush works. Its options will vary with the bush target selected (see the following sections) and for some targets no options will appear meaning that the selected brush target does not have any different actions


[edit] Ground Height

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target raises or lowers the Ground Surface Height by using a "painting" action


PalettesIcon S20.png This Brush Target uses the  Tool Options Palette . If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


 Brush Actions  When the  Ground Height  Target is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of several brush actions that control how the height is adjusted.
The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Height Up
BulletTick.png Height Down
BulletTick.png Set Height
BulletTick.png Grade
BrushToolsHeightOptions S20.png
PencilTips.PNG The  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting controls the rate or speed at which the height will be changed under the brush as you move it across the terrain.
100% = fastest: 1% = slowest
Ground Height Brush Actions:
 Height Up   Height Down  raises/lowers the ground under the brush at a rate controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting
 Set Height  "plateaus" the ground under the brush to the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting
 Grade  creates a smooth slope under the brush at the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  and  Angle  settings at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting


Ground heights are saved in the special Ground Height layer in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint.JPG This layer cannot be renamed, deleted, moved or merged with any other layer
DotPoint.JPG Most ground height edits are performed using either the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool. Limited ground height edits under a selected object or objects can be performed using the  Smooth Ground Under Selected  option in the objects Context Icon.


[edit]  5m Grid, 10m Grid, HD Grid 

    DownUp      
The choice of baseboard grid size affects the level of detail that it is possible to achieve in the ground terrain (for ditches, track beds, rail embankments and cuttings, etc) and the ground texture. The choice will also affect the physical size, in KB or MB, of the route when it is saved.
RailCutting10mGrid.png
Rail cutting through 10m Grid terrain
RailCuttingHDGrid.png
Rail cutting through HD Grid terrain
For more information on how your choice of grid size affects the ground height and ground textures, see PageLink.PNG Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size, PageLink.PNG Ground Texture Brush Size and Grid Size and PageLink.PNG HD Grid and Ground Textures below.
The choices are:-
 10m Grid  This has been the standard grid size since the earliest days. It gives the lowest level of detail and the smallest file sizes
 5m Grid  This was a later addition to the Trainz World. It gives about 4x as much detail as the 10m Grid but with an increase in file sizes
You can have both 10m Grid and 5m Grid baseboards in the same route. Placing, for example, the 10m Grid baseboards away from the tracks where a higher level of detail may not be needed, and the 5m Grid baseboards under and close to the tracks where more detail may be needed
 HD Grid  This is the latest addition to the Trainz World. It gives the highest level of detail, up to 6,400x greater than the 10m Grid, but with a signficant increase in file sizes.  HD Grid is only available in Trainz Plus . It is  NOT RECOMMENDED  that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route
NotePad.PNG In Trainz Plus and TRS22PE the level of file compression used when saving .cdp files was significantly increased to reduce the size of the files. The size limit for a .cdp file is 1 GB but larger assets, such as routes, can be saved by using Content Manager to open the asset in Windows Explorer and saving the folder using commonly available file compression software such as 7Zip or WinRAR


The grid size is set when a route is created and new baseboards are added but it can be changed at any time


[edit] Identifying the Grid Size

When you load a route into Surveyor there may be no obvious clues as to what the Grid size or sizes of its baseboards actually are and routes can have a mixture of baseboards set to 10m Grid and 5m Grid.


Question.PNG How Can You Identify the Grid Size of a Baseboard or Route?
  The only reliable way to check the grid size of a selected baseboard is to use the Ground Height Brush and set its radius to specific values to test the baseboard. The available grid sizes are HD (in Trainz Plus only), 10m and 5m with a mixture of 10m and 5m grid baseboards possible in the same route
PencilTips.PNG In Trainz Plus if you are near an edge baseboard then look over the edge. If you see a vertical wall dropping down then the route is using 5m/10m Grid. If no vertical wall is seen then it is using HD Grid


Steps: To detect HD Grid in Trainz Plus:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Ground Height Brush in the  Tools Palette  and set its  Radius  value in the  Tool Options Palette  to 0.2m
DotPoint2.JPG Move the Ground Height Brush in small circles around the surface but DO NOT hold down the mouse button
DotPoint.JPG If the brush circle is NOT red then the grid is HD
DotPoint.JPG If the brush circle is red everywhere then it is either a 5m Grid or a 10m Grid

See PageLink.PNG Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size for an example of this technique


Steps: To detect 5m Grid and 10m Grid in Trainz Plus and TRS22PE:-
  In Trainz Plus perform Steps  1  and  2  above first and if the baseboard is not HD Grid then continue with the following steps:-
DotPoint3.JPG Select the Ground Height Brush in the  Tools Palette  and set its  Radius  value in the  Tool Options Palette  to 3m
DotPoint4.JPG Move the Ground Height Brush in small circles around the surface but DO NOT hold down the mouse button
DotPoint.JPG If the brush circle does NOT turn red at any point of its motion then the grid size for that baseboard is 5m
DotPoint.JPG If the brush circle DOES turn red at some places then the grid size for that baseboard is 10m

See PageLink.PNG Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size for an example of this technique


[edit] Setting and Converting Grid Sizes

 Grid Options 
In TRS22PE:-
DotPoint.JPG 10m Grid - this is the default for the first baseboard when a new route is created and you can set 10m as the Grid size for each new baseboard when it is added
DotPoint.JPG 5m Grid - you can set 5m as the Grid size for each new baseboard when it is added. You can have a mixture of 5m and 10m Grid baseboards in the same route
NotePad.PNG HD Grid routes can be loaded into TRS22PE but the HD terrain will not appear at the same level of "sharpness" as it would in Trainz Plus - it will be "smoothed" to a lower grid resolution. The ground heights in HD routes cannot be edited in TRS22PE unless they are first converted to 5m Grid or 10m Grid
 
In Trainz Plus:-
DotPoint.JPG HD Grid (0.125m or 12.5cm) - this is the default for the first baseboard when a new route is created but you will have the option of selecting the Grid size for each new baseboard that you add. If you are using HD Grid then it is recommended that ALL the baseboards should use HD Grid
DotPoint.JPG 5m Grid - you can set 5m as the Grid size for each new baseboard when it is added. You can have a mixture of 5m and 10m Grid baseboards in the same route
DotPoint.JPG 10m Grid - you can set 10m as the Grid size for each new baseboard when it is added
 Grid Conversions 
In TRS22PE:-
The S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool is used to:-
DotPoint.JPG add individual and multiple baseboards. You can select their grid size from 5m Grid or 10m Grid and you can use both grid sizes in the same route
DotPoint.JPG convert individual and multiple baseboards between 5m Grid and 10m Grid or from HD Grid to either 5m Grid or 10m Grid
  See PageLink.PNG Managing Baseboards for more details on adding and converting baseboards
In Trainz Plus:-
The S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool is used to:-
DotPoint.JPG add individual and multiple baseboards. You can select their grid size from HD Grid, 5m Grid or 10m Grid.  It is NOT RECOMMENDED that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route
DotPoint.JPG convert individual and multiple baseboards between HD Grid, 5m Grid and 10m Grid.  It is NOT RECOMMENDED that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route
  See PageLink.PNG Managing Baseboards for more details on adding and converting baseboards
The SurveyorToolsIcon S20.png Surveyor Tools Menu has an option that will convert an entire route from 5m/10m Grid to HD Grid in a single step. See PageLink.PNG Upgrading a Route to HD


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG HD Grid routes are restricted to using just 16 different ground textures per baseboard, but each baseboard can have 16 completely different ground textures.
See PageLink.PNG HD Grid and Ground Textures below for more information
DotPoint.JPG With each increase in Grid level (from 10m to 5m to HD) there will be an increase in the route file size
DotPoint.JPG Converting to a higher Grid (e.g. from 10m to 5m) will not automatically increase the surface details that will be shown, you will have to do that work yourself
DotPoint.JPG Converting to or from HD Grid will "smooth" the surface details so a sharp ridge line, for example, will become a smoother ridge line. You may need to manually edit the ground terrain


[edit]  Ground Height Brush Tool Options 

    DownUp      
NotePad.PNG Notes: Tool Options Palette Controls

DotPoint.JPG The active ground height brush options for each action are shown in the  Tool Options Palette  with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.
DotPoint.JPG Most of the data entry boxes in the  Tool Options Palette  have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Height Up/Height Down 
Up/Down brush options
 Set Height 
Height brush options
 Grade 
Grade brush options
PencilTips.PNG On the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the value in smaller increments

 Radius  the brush radius (metres)
Range:  for 5m Grid and 10m Grid see Notes: below
0.12m and above for HD Grid (in Trainz Plus only)
 Height  the brush height (metres)
Range:  -3000m to +3000m
 Sensitivity  the rate at which the Height changes under the brush
Range:  1% (very slowly) to 100% (very quickly)
 Grade  slope gradient - see Notes: below
Range:  0% = flat ("Plateau" in Classic) to
  ±100% = steep (but not vertical)
 Angle  grade direction - see Notes: below
Range:  (North) to ±359°
a negative value reverses the grade direction


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to set an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, to a specific height then the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool might be a better choice.
DotPoint.JPG There is a lower limit to the brush  Radius  that is dictated by the baseboard grid size (10m Grid, 5m Grid or HD Grid). For the 5m Grid and the 10m Grid baseboards it is possible to have brushes smaller than the grid size but they will have restrictions imposed. These restrictions will increase as the brush becomes smaller. For HD Grid the minimum radius is 0.12m.
See PageLink.PNG Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size for the details.
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.
DotPoint.JPG The  Angle  controls the compass direction when creating a grade in the ground surface - = North, 180³ = South
Angles greater than 360° can be entered but will give the same result as the angle minus 360°. For example: 450° is exactly the same angle as 90° (450°-360°=90°)


[edit]  Identifying the Ground Height 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the current Ground Height of any spot in the route into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied the height can be applied to the Ground Height Brush or to any object in the route.
To copy the Ground Height into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Using the Eyedropper option found in all the tools
 
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG move the mouse pointer to the spot on the terrain
DotPoint2.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click 
This option is a good choice when there are no scenery objects (e.g. vegetation, splines, buildings, etc) over the ground being sampled by the eyedropper.
Warning: This will switch the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool from Ground Height to Ground Texture for painting with the texture or grid pattern at the location clicked
OR
Bblue.png Using the Compass and the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting
 
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click at the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG Right Click inside the  Height  setting box
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the menu option
 Get Height at Compass 
This option is recommended when there are scenery objects (e.g. vegetation, splines, buildings, etc) between the ground and the eyedropper. In these cases the object name shown in the eyedropper  Tooltip  is NOT the name of a ground texture or a grid pattern.
OR
Cblue.png Using the Compass and the  Info Palette 
 
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click at the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG Open the  Info Palette  Focus controls
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  the  z:  control down arrowhead icon
DotPoint4.JPG select the menu option
 Use Height for Brush 
This option involves more steps but is also recommended when there are scenery objects (e.g. vegetation, splines, buildings, etc) between the ground and the eyedropper. In these cases the object name shown in the eyedropper  Tooltip  is NOT the name of a ground texture or a grid pattern.


[edit]  "Painting" the Ground Height 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The ground surface is "sculptured" up, down or to a set height by using a "painting action" with the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool


Steps: To set the Ground Surface Height:-
PencilTips.PNG You can jump directly to step  3  by selecting the Ground Height layer in the  Layers Palette . Once the  Ground Height  target has been selected the minimum steps needed to start changing the terrain are  3  and  5 
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  Left Click on the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Ground Height  from the brush Target Drop Down Menu
DotPoint3.JPG select the brush Action ( Height Up ,  Height Down , etc)
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any of the brush controls -  Radius , Height ,  Grade ,  Angle ,  Sensitivity 
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to change the terrain height


PencilTips.PNG You can use the Marquee Tool to set a large area, an entire baseboard or several baseboards to a specific height. See PageLink.PNG Managing Baseboards for more details
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The rate or speed at which the ground height changes under the brush is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting

Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% for the smallest possible change with each sweep of the brush
BlackDot10x10.png 100% for the largest possible change with each sweep of the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to set the terrain of an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, to a set height then the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool may be a better choice.
DotPoint.JPG There is a lower limit to the brush  Radius  that is dictated by the baseboard grid size (10m Grid, 5m Grid or HD Grid). For 5m and 10m Grids brushes smaller than the set grid size are possible but will have restrictions that will increase as the brush becomes smaller. For HD Grid the minimum radius is 0.12m.
See PageLink.PNG Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size for the details.


BlueDot10x10.png Most objects have a height value that can be set and altered using the objects Context Menu or through the Placement, Free Move and Fine Adjustment tools (see the sections below dealing with each of these tools for more details).


Object Context Menu Ground Height Options
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following Ground Height specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the objects Context Menu.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected object to match the set height of the object. The size of the area affected will depend on which has the greater value: the width of the object OR the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the ground height will be set to match, as far as possible, the heights of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected objects to match the height of the ground beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected object to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Where multiple objects have been selected the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the  Height  value and the other selected objects will have their heights adjusted up or down by the same amount


[edit]  Ground Height Brush Size and Grid Size 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The minimum allowed brush size is dictated by the set baseboard grid size
BlueDot10x10.png Brushes that are smaller than the set grid size are possible but they will have restrictions on where they can be used


[edit] Ground Heights in 5m/10m Grids

Ground height brushes can be smaller than the set 5m Grid or 10m Grid baseboard size. For example: you can alter the ground height with a brush size of 2.5m on a 10m Grid baseboard but there will be restrictions on where you can use a bush that small.
DotPoint.JPG When the brush size is from 50% to under 100% of the grid size (e.g. from 2.5m to 4.9m in a 5m Grid or from 5m to 9.9m in a 10m Grid) then it will work best when used on the grid lines - yellow lines for the 10m Grid, and both grey and yellow lines for the 5m Grid. Between the grid lines its effect will be reduced.
DotPoint.JPG When the brush size is less than 50% of the grid size (e.g. <2.5m for the 5m Grid or <5.0m for the 10m Grid) then it will be restricted to the grid line intersections - yellow for the 10m Grid, and both yellow and grey for the 5m Grid.
BrushCircleHeight01mA@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mB@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mC@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mX@05m.png The RED brush circle indicates that the brush size is too small to work in that part of the grid square
Resolution: 5m Grid - Brush Size: 1m  


[edit] Ground Heights in HD Grid

BlueDot10x10.png You cannot have a brush size smaller than 0.12m (12cm)
BlueDot10x10.png The brush is not restricted to grid lines or intersections and can alter the ground height anywhere within each grid square
The Surveyor Route Editor will allow you to switch between two minimum brush sizes when working with HD Grid routes.
This option, available in Trainz Plus only, allows you to set the brush detail to the default HD (High Definition) or to a lower SD (Standard Definition) which is easier to work with over larger areas.


The distinction between these two options is:-
 HD  This is the full HD Mode where the minimum brush size is 0.12m (12cm). This is the default selection
 SD  This is a reduced HD Mode where the minimum brush size is 2m
Both modes:-
DotPoint.JPG have all the normal HD controls and features
DotPoint.JPG will work anywhere within the grid squares of a HD Grid route and are not restricted to the grid lines or intersections
DotPoint.JPG can be used in different areas of the same baseboard
The setting can be switched during editing without affecting or altering the existing terrain. For example:-
DotPoint.JPG you can start editing the terrain using the HD Mode to give you the highest level of precision in one area of a baseboard
DotPoint.JPG then switch to SD Mode to work in another area of the same (or a different) baseboard at a lower level of precision - which would be faster than using the HD Mode
DotPoint.JPG then switch back to HD Mode to continue working in the same, or another, high precision area
Steps: To switch between HD and SD modes at any time:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the Main Menu EditMenu S20.png Edit Menu and select the  Edit Route...  option
Shortcut: Press  Ctrl  +  E 
This will open the Route Editor dialogue window which, in Trainz Plus only, has an additional control, the Route Edit Detail
RouteEditDetailHD S20.png
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on either the  SD  or the  HD  button
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the Tick icon at the bottom right of the dialogue window to make the switch
EditMenuOptions S20.png


NotePad.PNG When using  SD  mode brush sizes less than 2m will be ignored and a 2m brush size will be used instead. Larger brush sizes can be set and used


[edit]  Terrain Forming Tips 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG Using Splines to Set a Ground Gradient
See PageLink.PNG Add a Spline Object for more details but once you have set a spline segment to a specific gradient you can bring the terrain up or down to match the gradient beneath the spline so that it will sit smoothly on top of the ground. Use the following steps:-
Steps: To Use Splines to Form the Terrain:-
DotPoint1.JPG After laying the spline segment set its gradient to the required value or its endpoints to the required heights
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set the  Radius  control to the required brush radius. The distance on each side of the spline that will be affected will increase with larger entered values. The minimum radius value will depend on the set baseboard grid size - approximately 10m radius for 10m and 5m grids, 5m for HD grids
DotPoint3.JPG Open the spline segments Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) and select the option  Smooth Ground Under Selected 
DotPoint4.JPG If it is no longer needed you can delete the spline leaving the ground with its new gradient
NotePad.PNG You can also perform this operation with multiple spline segments (each with a different gradient if needed) using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool and the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit] Ground Texture

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target paints the currently selected Ground Texture (from the  Assets Palette ) on the ground


PalettesIcon S20.png This Brush Target uses the  Tool Options Palette ,  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


 Brush Actions  When the  Ground Texture  Target is selected, the second drop down box will be disabled - there are no brush texture actions.


Ground textures are saved in the special Ground Texture layer in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint.JPG This layer cannot be renamed, deleted, moved or merged with any other layer
DotPoint.JPG Ground texture edits are usually performed using either the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool. Limited ground texture edits under a selected object or objects can be performed using the  Paint Under Selected  option in the objects Context Icon.


[edit]  Ground Texture Brush Tool Options 

    DownUp      
NotePad.PNG Notes: Tool Options Palette Controls

DotPoint.JPG The active texture brush options are shown in the  Tool Options Palette  with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.
DotPoint.JPG Most of the data entry boxes in the  Tool Options Palette  have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


Texture brush options
 Radius  the brush radius (metres)
Range:  for 5m Grid and 10m Grid see Notes: below
0.12m and above for HD Grid (in Trainz Plus only)
 Sensitivity  texture transparency
Range:  1% = almost transparent to
  100% = solid (opaque)
 Rotation  initial rotation angle - see Notes: below
Range:  to ±359° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the texture pattern scaling factor as a %
Range:  0.01% = smallest

100% = full size

>100% larger than full size
NotePad.PNG The  Height   Grade  and  Angle  settings have no effect on textures as they are always painted on the existing ground surface.
PencilTips.PNG On the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the value in smaller increments


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to paint an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, then the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool will be quicker but it will not give you the options of changing the scale and rotation while painting the texture.
DotPoint.JPG There is a lower limit to the brush  Radius  that is dictated by the baseboard grid size (10m Grid, 5m Grid or HD Grid). For the 5m Grid and the 10m Grid it is possible to have brushes smaller than the set grid size but they will have restrictions imposed. These restrictions will increase as the brush becomes smaller. For HD Grid the minimum radius is 0.12m.
See PageLink.PNG Ground Texture Brush Size and Grid Size for the details.
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  controls the starting compass angle ( = North, 180° = South) for the texture when painting and is often used to avoid pattern repetition. As in Surveyor Classic, holding down the  [  or  ]  keys while painting will continuously change the rotation angle


[edit]  Identifying and Selecting a Ground Texture 

    DownUp      

Ablue.png If you have a ground texture in your route that you want to identify or select again.

Steps: To Identify an existing Ground Texture used in the Route:-
DotPoint1.JPG Move the mouse pointer onto the texture to be identified and hold down the  Alt  key. The textures name name will appear in the pointers  ToolTip 
Steps: To Select an existing Ground Texture used in the Route:-
DotPoint2.JPG While holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the texture

The texture will be selected in the  Assets Palette , the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool and its Ground Texture target will also be activated so you can immediately start painting with that texture using the current  Tool Options Palette  settings. This will also copy the Ground Height at the selected point into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting but this value is ignored when painting with a texture.


Bblue.png If a ground texture is not in your route or it is not visible in your Surveyor view, then it can be selected from the  Assets Palette .

Steps: To select a new Texture:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  if the Ground Textures GroundTextureFilter S20.png icon, the first icon in the list, is not selected (shown in blue) then  Left Click  on the GroundTextureFilter S20.png icon or select Ground Textures from the Content Drop Down Menu.
FilterPaletteDefault S20.png
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option of adding a text string to the  Search  box to narrow down the search results
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Assets Palette  when the ground texture you want is shown in the list  Left Click  on its name to select it

After selecting a texture both the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool and its Ground Texture target will be selected so you can immediately start painting with that texture using the current  Tool Options Palette  settings
AssetsPaletteNew S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting Ground Textures in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed ground textures in the  Assets Palette .
DotPoint.JPG For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


[edit]  Painting a Ground Texture 

    DownUp      
Steps: To Paint with a Ground Texture:-
PencilTips.PNG If the  Assets Palette  is already showing the list of ground textures then you can jump directly to step  4 . If it is not showing the ground textures then you can still jump directly to step  4  by selecting the Ground Texture layer in the  Layers Palette 
Once the  Ground Texture  target has been selected the minimum steps needed to start painting are  5  and  7 
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  Left Click on the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Ground Texture  from the brush Target Drop Down Menu
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Filter Palette  select the Ground Texture list by a  Left Click  on the GroundTextureFilter S20.png icon (the first icon in the row)
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option of narrowing the search by entering the name or a partial name of the texture in the  Search  box
DotPoint5.JPG In the  Assets Palette  select the required Ground Texture from the filtered list
DotPoint6.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any brush controls -  Radius ,  Sensitivity ,  Rotation ,  Scale 
DotPoint7.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to start painting


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG You can use the Marquee Tool to paint a large area, an entire baseboard or several baseboards with a selected ground texture. See PageLink.PNG Managing Baseboards for more details
DotPoint.JPG You can set a default Ground Texture that will automatically cover every new baseboard added. See PageLink.PNG Default Baseboard Ground Texture below for more details
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The intensity at which the ground texture is painted is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting. This allows you to paint over an existing texture (including the Grid pattern) in a way that will let most, some or none of the original texture show through

Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% to make the new texture almost transparent. The level of transparency will decrease with each new brush sweep over the same area
BlackDot10x10.png 50% to make the new texture 50% or semi-transparent
BlackDot10x10.png 100% to make the new texture completely hide the original texture with a single sweep of the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to paint an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, then the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool will be quicker but it will not give you options for changing the brush properties when painting.
DotPoint.JPG There is a lower limit to the brush  Radius  that is dictated by the baseboard grid size (10m Grid, 5m Grid or HD Grid). For the 5m Grid and the 10m Grid it is possible to have brushes smaller than the set grid size but they will have restrictions imposed. These restrictions will increase as the brush becomes smaller. For HD Grid the minimum radius is 0.12m.
See PageLink.PNG Ground Texture Brush Size and Grid Size for the details.


BlueDot10x10.png Most objects can have a Ground Texture automatically painted beneath them.


Object Context Menu Ground Texture Option
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following Ground Texture specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the objects Context Menu.
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out. This option is frequently used to paint a texture under selected track (or other) splines.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.


[edit]  Ground Texture Brush Size and Grid Size 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The minimum allowed brush size is dictated by the set baseboard grid size
BlueDot10x10.png Brushes that are smaller than the set grid size are possible but they will have restrictions on where they can be used


[edit] Ground Texture in 5m/10m Grids

Ground texture brushes can be smaller than the set 5m Grid or 10m Grid baseboard size. For example: you can paint a ground texture with a brush size of 2.5m on a 10m Grid baseboard but there will be restrictions on where you can use a bush that small.
DotPoint.JPG When the brush size is from 50% to under 100% of the grid size (e.g. from 2.5m to 4.9m in a 5m Grid or from 5m to 9.9m in a 10m Grid) then it will work best when used on the grid lines - yellow lines for the 10m Grid, and both grey and yellow lines for the 5m Grid. Between the grid lines its effect will be reduced.
DotPoint.JPG When the brush size is less than 50% of the grid size (e.g. <2.5m for the 5m Grid or <5.0m for the 10m Grid) then it will be restricted to the grid line intersections - yellow for the 10m Grid, and both yellow and grey for the 5m Grid.
BrushCircleHeight01mA@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mB@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mC@05m.png BrushCircleHeight01mX@05m.png The RED brush circle indicates that the brush size is too small to work in that part of the grid square
Resolution: 5m Grid - Brush Size: 1m  


[edit] Ground Textures in HD Grid

BlueDot10x10.png You cannot have a brush size smaller than 0.12m (12cm)
BlueDot10x10.png The brush is not restricted to grid lines or intersections and can paint a ground texture anywhere within each grid square
The Surveyor Route Editor will allow you to switch between two minimum brush sizes when working with HD Grid routes.
This option, available in Trainz Plus only, allows you to set the brush detail to the default HD (High Definition) or to a lower SD (Standard Definition) which is easier to work with over larger areas.


The distinction between these two options is:-
 HD  This is the full HD Mode where the minimum brush size is 0.12m (12cm). This is the default selection
 SD  This is a reduced HD Mode where the minimum brush size is 2m
Both modes:-
DotPoint.JPG have all the normal HD controls and features
DotPoint.JPG will work anywhere within the grid squares of a HD Grid route and are not restricted to the grid lines or intersections
DotPoint.JPG can be used in different areas of the same baseboard
The setting can be switched during editing without affecting or altering the existing ground textures. For example:-
DotPoint.JPG you can start painting a ground texture using the HD Mode to give you the highest level of precision in one area of a baseboard
DotPoint.JPG then switch to SD Mode to work in another area of the same (or a different) baseboard at a lower level of precision - which would be faster than using the HD Mode
DotPoint.JPG then switch back to HD Mode to continue working in the same, or another, high precision area
Steps: To switch between HD and SD modes at any time:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the Main Menu EditMenu S20.png Edit Menu and select the  Edit Route...  option
Shortcut: Press  Ctrl  +  E 
This will open the Route Editor dialogue window which, in Trainz Plus only, has an additional control, the Route Edit Detail
RouteEditDetailHD S20.png
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on either the  SD  or the  HD  button
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the Tick icon at the bottom right of the dialogue window to make the switch
EditMenuOptions S20.png


NotePad.PNG When using  SD  mode brush sizes less than 2m will be ignored and a 2m brush size will be used instead. Larger brush sizes can be set and used


You are limited to using 16 ground textures in each HD Grid baseboard
See PageLink.PNG HD Grid and Ground Textures below for information on this restriction


[edit]  Texture Painting Tips 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG Rotate the Brush While Painting
The texture brush can be rotated while painting to help breakup any repetition patterns that may form. These patterns can appear when a non-uniform texture (e.g. a photoimage of an actual ground surface) is used as the texture. The rotation will "randomise" the texture appearance to avoid the patterns forming. Use one of the following techniques:-
Ablue.png While painting with the texture brush periodically alter the  Rotation  setting in the  Tool Options Palette  by any required angle OR
Bblue.png While painting with the texture brush hold down the  [  or the  ]  key. This will continuosly rotate the brush texture in 10° increments while painting BUT it can result in the texture image looking "blurred" and losing detail. This will be particulary noticeable where the texture is made from a photo image, such as the rocks in a cliff face or the "litter" on a forest floor. A variation of this technique that avoids this blurring effect in such situations is to periodically "tap" one of those keys instead of holding it down continuously

PencilTips.PNG Paint Under Splines and Mesh Objects
Once a spline or scenery mesh object has been added it can have a ground texture painted beneath it. Use the following technique:-
Steps: To Paint a Texture Under any Object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Use either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to select the object, spline segment or multiple spline segments. You can also use the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool on a single object immediately after it has been added by the Placement Tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  select a texture
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set the brush  Radius  value which will set the width of the painted area out from the centre of the object. The smaller the radius the less "realistic" the texture painting can appear
DotPoint4.JPG Open the Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) of the selected object
DotPoint5.JPG Select the option  Paint Under Selected  - if you have not selected a texture in the  Assets Palette  then this option will not be available

PencilTips.PNG Use a Color Effect Layer to Enhance a Ground Texture (The Color Effect Layer is only available in Trainz Plus and for HD routes)

A color effect layer is used to add tinting to existing ground textures in selected areas of a route. Use the following technique:-

Steps: To Paint a Color Effect Layer Over a Texture:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Layers Palette  select the Color Effect Layer. If no color effect layer is present then you will need to create one (see PageLink.PNG Edit a Color Effect Layer) or load one (see PageLink.PNG Load a Preset Effect Layer)
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  select the brush  Radius ,  Sensitivity  and the  Color  to be painted. See PageLink.PNG Color Effect Layer for the details
DotPoint3.JPG Use the brush to paint the effect over a selected area

PencilTips.PNG Identify an Existing Ground Texture and its Settings

If you need to identify a texture already in the route and duplicate its settings then use the following technique:-

Steps: To Identify a Ground Texture and Copy its Settings:-
DotPoint1.JPG Move the mouse pointer onto the texture used in the route
DotPoint2.JPG Hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on the texture. This will copy the  Rotation  and  Scale  settings from the placed texture into the  Tool Options Palette  as well as select that texture in the  Assets Palette 


[edit]  Default Baseboard Ground Texture 

    DownUp      
When a new route is created or a new baseboard is added it will be covered with the ground texture for the selected Region or the default texture if no region has been set. This can be changed to a different texture (including to the standard TRS19/TRS22 grid pattern).
MainMenuSetGroundTexture.png
Steps: To disable the current default ground texture (easiest method):-
DotPoint1.JPG open the SurveyorDisplayIcon.png Surveyor Display Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Ground  option
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Grid  sub-option. This will use the current grid texture.
A more complex solution is to edit an existing Region or create one of your own to add your preferred ground texture (such as the standard TRS19/22 grid pattern) to each new route you create and every new baseboard that you add.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Baseboard Ground Texture, chosen from the Surveyor Display Menu or by specifying a Region, will become the default for every new route you create and every new baseboard you add, until you change it to something else.
LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing Region assets can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


[edit]  HD Grid and Ground Textures 

    DownUp      
HD Grid is only available as an option in Trainz Plus
The HD option provides a surface grid size in Trainz Plus of 0.125m (12.5cm) from the standard 5m or 10m grid sizes. This gives you far more realistic terrain for cuttings, embankments, ditches, drains, the track bed, etc.

However, there is a price that has to be paid for using this feature. You will be limited to a maximum of 16 different ground textures PER BASEBOARD but each baseboard can have 16 completely different ground textures.

NotePad.PNG Notes:

This is a limitation imposed by your computer hardware and not one "plucked out of the air" by N3V to make life more difficult for route creators. Other sims/games that use High Definition (HD), or its equivalent, have the same or an even more restrictive limit (e.g. 8 textures per baseboard equivalent)


Question.PNG What happens if you exceed the limit of 16 textures in a baseboard?
DotPoint.JPG If you have upgraded a route from 5m Grid or 10m Grid to HD Grid (see PageLink.PNG Upgrading a Route to HD) then Trainz Plus will replace any textures in any baseboards that are over the limit with textures already used in those baseboards. The upgrade process will give you the x and y co-ordinates of all the altered baseboards so you can check for any visible changes
DotPoint.JPG If you are adding ground textures to a HD route and paint a new texture onto a baseboard that already has 16 ground textures, then the new texture will be replaced by one that is already present in that baseboard


PencilTips.PNG There is a simple way to get around the 16 textures per baseboard limit - add a Color Effect Layer (in Trainz Plus and HD routes only).

This layer allows different coloured tints to be painted over individual areas of the existing ground textures to alter their appearence and increase the range of colours in a baseboard.

The Color Effect Layer only works in routes that use the HD grid sizes. Details can be found in the PageLink.PNG Effect Layers section below.


[edit] Scrapbook Data

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target paints the currently selected Scrapbook (from the  Scrapbook Palette ) onto the ground
BlueDot10x10.png When pasted or painted the Scrapbook can be
BlackDot10x10.png resized and rotated (to any angle)
BlackDot10x10.png filtered to select which of its assets will be used
BlackDot10x10.png set to replace or add to any assets already present


PalettesIcon S20.png This Brush Target uses both the  Tool Options Palette  and the  Scrapbook Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Creating a Scrapbook 

    DownUp      

A new scrapbook is created by one of two methods:-

Options:
Ablue.png use the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool to select an area of the route containing objects. You can use the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to restrict the objects that will be selected for the scrapbook OR
Bblue.png use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to select a group of individual objects for the scrapbook. You can use the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to restrict the objects that will be selected for the scrapbook


Steps: Copy or Move the Selected Objects into the Scrapbook:-
DotPoint1.JPG use either Option Ablue.png or Option Bblue.png above to select the objects to be included in the scrapbook
DotPoint2.JPG if you intend to keep this scrapbook (make it permanent) then position your camera (screen point of view) to give the best view of the selected objects. The screen view will become the thumbnail for the scrapbook
DotPoint3.JPG then either:-
Ablue.png  Left Click  on the displayed Context Menu icon (or press the  T  key) and select either the  Copy  or  Cut  option OR
Bblue.png press either  Ctrl  +  C  (Copy) or  Ctrl  +  X  (Cut)
NotePad.PNG In both cases using the  Ctrl  +  X  or  Cut  options will remove the selected objects from your Trainz World if they are NOT in locked layers
More detailed instructions on creating Scrapbooks can be found in the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool section of this document
NotePad.PNG Scrapbooks will normally expire (self delete) after 5 days. Instructions on how to make a scrapbook permanent can be found at PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Palette below
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG But  NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
The ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers in the Marquee Selection Area (method Ablue.png above) or under the selected objects (method Bblue.png) will always be added to the scrapbook. You can use the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to control which other objects will also be added


[edit]  Pasting a Scrapbook 

    DownUp      

To paste a scrapbook into your Trainz World:-

Steps: To Paste a Scrapbook:-
PencilTips.PNG The minimum steps needed to paste the scrapbook currently shown as a thumbnail in the  Scrapbook Palette  are  1  and  4 . This will paste using the current settings in the Scrapbook Filter and the  Tool Options Palette . The  Scrapbook Palette  does not have to be visible on the screen
DotPoint1.JPG Move the Compass Rose to the position where the scrapbook will be placed
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Scrapbook Palette  select the required Scrapbook. Its image will be shown in the palette thumbnails
DotPoint3.JPG Set the PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters to include/exclude any objects or features
DotPoint4.JPG Press the keys  Ctrl  +  V . You can also select an object, open its Context Menu and select the  Paste  option - the scrapbook will still be placed at the current position of the compass rose
NotePad.PNG The scrapbook will be pasted inside a Marquee Selection Area which can be moved and/or resized. See the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool for more details. The  Tool Options Palette  controls  Scale  and  Rotation  have no effect when pasting a scrapbook
DotPoint5.JPG If you change your mind immediately after the Scrapbook has been pasted and while it is still surrounded by the Marquee Selection Area, you can remove the scrapbook objects by pressing the  Delete  key
DotPoint6.JPG To remove the Marquee Selection Area but leave the pasted scrapbook intact,  Left Click  anywhere outside the area or press the  Ctrl  +  D  keys
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data types are added to your Trainz World and how they are added.


[edit]  Scrapbook Pasting Tips 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG Add Variety to Pasting a Scrapbook
A single scrapbook can be pasted many times in a layout but each instance can have variations that will make it different from the others. Use the following technique:-
Steps: To add variety to Pasting a Scrapbook:-
DotPoint1.JPG Use the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters to change the elements that are placed into the route (e.g. Ground, Scenery, Textures, Splines, Effect Layers) and how they are added (None, Add, Overwrite) each time it is pasted


[edit]  Scrapbook Brush Actions 

    DownUp      
 Brush Actions  When the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool has been selected from the  Tools Palette  and the  Scrapbook Data  Target is also selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of two brush actions that control how the scrapbook is applied.
The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Brush
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Clone
BrushToolsScrapbookOptions S20.png
Scrapbook Brush Actions:
 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size
 Scrapbook Clone  will paint the scrapbook sized according to the  Tool Options Palette   Scale  setting


NotePad.PNG Notes:

 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size.
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is small then the scrapbook contents will be compressed closer together
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is large then the contents will be spaced further apart
DotPoint.JPG Every  Left Click  will paste another complete scrapbook copy
DotPoint.JPG The  Scale  setting in the  Tool Options Palette  is ignored.
 Scrapbook Clone  will paste the scrapbook sized according to the  Tool Options Palette   Scale  setting (100% = original size)
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is the same size as the scaled scrapbook then a single exact copy will be painted
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is smaller than the scaled scrapbook in size then only the central part of the scrapbook will be revealed and more will be added when the brush is moved around until the "painted" area covers the same area as the scaled scrapbook. Further painting will clone or tile the scrapbook contents
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is larger than the scaled scrapbook in size then the contents will be cloned or tiled to fill the set brush radius
See PageLink.PNG Using the Scrapbook Clone Brush below for examples and more information
 
Stop.PNG WARNING:
Take care if setting both the  Scale  and  Radius . Using extreme values for both, such as a very large brush radius and a very small scale value, can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents (see PageLink.PNG Using the Scrapbook Clone Brush for more details)


[edit]  Scrapbook Brush Tool Options 

    DownUp      
NotePad.PNG Notes: Tool Options Palette Controls

DotPoint.JPG The active scrapbook brush options for each action are shown in the  Tool Options Palette  with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.
DotPoint.JPG Most of the data entry boxes in the  Tool Options Palette  have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Scrapbook Brush 
Brush options
 Scrapbook Clone 
Clone options
PencilTips.PNG On the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the value in smaller increments


 Radius  the brush radius (metres)
Range:  for 5m Grid and 10m Grid see Notes: below
0.12m and above for HD Grid (in Trainz Plus only)
 Sensitivity  if the  Ground Height  option has been enabled in the  Scrapbook Palette  filter settings, then this will set the rate or speed at which the ground height will change under the brush
Range:  1% = slowest
100% = fastest
 Rotation  initial rotation angle (degrees) - see Notes: below
Range:  to ±359° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the scrapbook scaling factor (Scrapbook Clone brush action only) - see Notes: below
Range:  0.01% = smallest

100% = full size

>100% larger than full size
 Shape  brush shape
Options:  BrushToolsScrapShapes S20.png  Circle  and  Square  will set the brush to the selected shape with the  Radius  setting the brush size
   Natural  will set the brush to the same shape as the Marquee that created the scrapbook, which may be rectangular. The  Radius  setting will scale the brush size
NotePad.PNG The  Height  setting has no effect on the Scrapbook. This feature is controlled by the  Scrapbook Palette  Filter  Ground Height  options.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases.
DotPoint.JPG There is a lower limit to the brush  Radius  that is dictated by the baseboard grid size (10m Grid, 5m Grid or HD Grid). For small brushes using the 5m and 10m Grids the scrapbook is not confined to the grid lines or intersections unlike small Ground Height and Ground Texture brushes. For the HD Grid the minimum brush radius is 0.12m.
DotPoint.JPG Painting with a small brush size using the Scrapbook Brush target will compress the entire scrapbook into the brush size.


[edit]  Painting with the Scrapbook Brush 

    DownUp      
Steps: To "paint" with a Scrapbook asset:-
PencilTips.PNG The minimum steps needed to paint the scrapbook currently shown as a thumbnail in the  Scrapbook Palette  are  1   2   3  and  7 . This will paint using the current settings in the Scrapbook Filter and the  Tool Options Palette . The  Scrapbook Palette  does not have to be visible on the screen
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Scrapbook Data  target from the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool first drop down menu
DotPoint3.JPG select a brush action ( Scrapbook Brush  or  Scrapbook Clone ) from the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool second drop down menu
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Scrapbook Palette  select a Scrapbook asset to be painted (see PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Palette below)
DotPoint5.JPG In the  Scrapbook Palette  open the Scrapbook Filter and select the features to be painted and the method used (see PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters below)
DotPoint6.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any Brush controls such as the  Radius 
DotPoint7.JPG  Left Click  or Left Click and Drag (depending on your brush selection in Step  3 ) on the terrain to paint with the scrapbook asset
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data types are added to your Trainz World and how they are added.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  control in the  Tool Options Palette  sets the starting angle for painting the scrapbook objects and you can adjust that angle in increments of 1°
DotPoint.JPG The  [  and  ]  keys will rotate the angle for painting the scrapbook objects in increments of 10° BUT unlike painting with a Ground Texture you CANNOT hold down these keys to continuously rotate the brush while painting with a Scrapbook. The best option while painting is to periodically release the mouse, tap one of the rotation keys and then resume painting - repeat as necessary
DotPoint.JPG The  Ground Height  options in the Scrapbook Filters controls how the terrain heights in the Scrapbook are applied. The  Height  setting in the  Tool Options Palette  will be ignored
DotPoint.JPG Setting extreme values for the  Scale  and  Radius  when using the  Scrapbook Data Clone Brush  can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents into the route (see PageLink.PNG Using the Scrapbook Clone Brush for more details)


PencilTips.PNG If you have set the  Ground Height  Scrapbook Filter Option to Add or Overwrite (see PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters below) then the rate or speed at which the ground height changes will be controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting

Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% for the smallest possible change with each sweep of the brush
BlackDot10x10.png 100% for the largest possible change with each sweep of the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area


[edit] Using the Scrapbook Clone Brush

When using the  Scrapbook Clone  brush its  Radius  and  Scale  settings in the  Tool Options Palette  are important.


For Example: Two trees as shown below are captured as a Scrapbook with a size of 2x1 baseboard squares.
ScrapbookCloneBrushOriginal.png
The S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool target is set to Scrapbook Data and its action set to Scrapbook Clone. The effects of different  Radius  and  Scale  settings in the  Tool Options Palette  are shown below.
The Scrapbook Clone brush action will normally show the scaled size and shape of the scrapbook within the brush shape itself, in this case a circle.
ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle01.png

DotPoint1.JPG When the brush radius is the same as the scaled scrapbook size then a single copy of the scrapbook will be painted into the brush.

An exception will be when the scrapbook is not square, as shown, in which case some of the scrapbook may be cloned and painted in the spaces on each side of the marked scrapbook shape but this will depend on the contents of the scrapbook. In this situation it may be better to select the  Natural  brush shape in the  Tool Options Palette .

DotPoint.JPG A single  Left Click  will paint the entire scrapbook within the brush shape.
DotPoint.JPG A  Left Click and Drag  will paint and clone the scrapbook as the mouse moves across the terrain.
ScrapbookCloneBrushNatural01.png

Using the  Natural  brush shape

ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle03.png

DotPoint2.JPG By reducing the brush radius or increasing its scale (or both) then only part of the scrapbook will fit into the brush (no scrapbook brush outline will be shown)

DotPoint.JPG A single  Left Click  will only paint the central part of the scrapbook.
DotPoint.JPG A  Left Click and Drag  will paint and reveal more of the scrapbook as the mouse moves across the terrain.
ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle02.png

DotPoint3.JPG By increasing the brush radius or reducing its scale (or both) then the scrapbook will be cloned so that several copies will be painted into the brush.
These are shown as additional scrapbook shapes within the brush area.

DotPoint.JPG A single  Left Click  will paint multiple copies of the scrapbook within the brush shape as shown below.


ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle02P.png
ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle04.png

DotPoint4.JPG By reducing the brush scale to an extreme (e.g. 1%) then the scrapbook will be cloned multiple times.

DotPoint.JPG A single  Left Click  will fill each individual "micro-grid" inside the brush shape (shown as a "mesh pattern" in the image) with a scaled down but complete copy of the entire scrapbook.


This will almost certainly cause performance issues (long delays, "freezing") as the program attempts to both scale and clone the scrapbook. The end result is shown below.

ScrapbookCloneBrushCircle04P.png


[edit]  Scrapbook Painting Tips 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG Add Variety to Painting a Scrapbook
A single scrapbook can be reused many times in a layout but each instance can have variations that will make it different from the others. Use the following techniques:-
Steps: To add variety to Painting a Scrapbook:-
DotPoint1.JPG Use the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters to change the elements that are placed into the route (e.g. Ground, Scenery, Textures, Splines, Effect Layers) and how they are added (None, Add, Overwrite) each time it is painted
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  alter the  Scale  and  Rotation  settings . This works best when the Ground Height and Effect Layers scrapbook filter options have been set to  None 
 
Steps: To avoid repetition patterns forming when painting with a scrapbook:-
DotPoint1.JPG Press the  [  or  ]  rotation keys between mouse clicks. Each key press will rotate the brush by 10°.  NOTE: Unlike painting a ground texture, you cannot hold down these keys while painting with a scrapbook 


[edit]  The Scrapbook Palette 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png This palette selects the scrapbook to be painted or pasted as well as performing a very limited range of management tasks


ScrapbookToolsTop S20.png
ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.pngScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png  Left Click  on the pin icon to Lock (blue pin) and Unlock (white pin) the scrapbook. Locked scrapbooks are permanent (but can still be deleted). Unlocked scrapbooks will "expire" (self delete) after 5 days
DeleteIcon S20.png  Left Click  on the delete icon to delete the current scrapbook - most scrapbooks can be deleted (see Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks below on how to deal with the exceptions to this)
NotePad.PNG Deleting a scrapbook WILL NOT delete any objects that it has painted or pasted into the route. The scrapbook simply identifies the objects, it has no control over them after they have been added to the route.
ScrapbookThumbnail S20.png The thumbnail of the currently displayed scrapbook and the one that will be painted or pasted into the route
ScrapbookCounter S20.png Identifies the currently displayed scrapbook (the first number) and the total number of stored scrapbooks (the second number)
ScrapbookLeftRight S20.png  Left Click  on the  <  or  >  to move forwards or backwards through the stored scrapbooks to select the scrapbook that will be added to the route
  The scrapbook name can be edited. Simply  Left Click  inside the name box to edit or replace the current name then  Left Click  on the image OR press the  Enter  key


NotePad.PNG Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks

Some scrapbooks are installed with Trainz and cannot be deleted. These scrapbooks have the label Prefab at the front of their names (you may have to scroll to the front of the name to see it). While they cannot be deleted they can be "disabled" so that they won't appear as an installed scrapbook. Unlocking them will not cause them to "expire" - after 5 days they will just become locked again.
Steps: To disable built-in scrapbooks
DotPoint1.JPG Open Content Manager and locate the "permanent" scrapbook or scrapbooks.
Search Tips: Name: starts with "Prefab"; Status: is Built-in; Type: is Misc
DotPoint2.JPG Highlight (select) the scrapbook assets individually or as a group
DotPoint3.JPG Open the Content menu and select the  Disable  option
You can reverse this and enable any or all of these scrapbooks at any time if you need them.


[edit]  The Scrapbook Filters 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The filters control which elements in the scrapbook are added to the route and how they are added.
Step: To Open the Scrapbook Filters
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the arrowhead next to the  Filters:  label below the scrapbook image to open the scrapbook filters.


ScrapbookToolsBottom S20.png


PencilTips.PNG Sample Filter Settings:-
You can vary the appearance of the scrapbook when added to a route by painting or pasting it with different filter combinations. For example:-
 Ground Height:   None  ground height data will not be pasted and the ground heights already in the target area will be used
 Ground Texture:  Overwrite  textures present in the scrapbook will replace those already in the target area
 Meshes:  Add  scenery objects in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Splines:  Add  scenery splines in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Effect Layers:   None  effect layers in the scrapbook will not be pasted and any already in the target area will be used
PencilTips.PNG You can also add more variety when painting a Scrapbook by changing its  Tool Options Palette   Scale  and  Rotation  settings in combination with different Filter selections (as shown above). These settings have no effect when pasting a Scrapbook
 Scrapbook Painting/Pasting Options 
 What Data to Transfer 
    Ground Height  terrain height(s) used in the scrapbook
    Texture  ground textures used in the scrapbook
    Meshes  scenery objects (e.g. trees, buildings) used in the scrapbook
    Splines  spline objects used in the scrapbook
    Effect Layers  TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers used in the scrapbook
 How to Transfer the Data
    None  do not paint/paste this data
    Add  add this data to that already present
    Overwrite  replace the data already present
For the Ground Height:-
    None  do not paint/paste the scrapbook ground heights, use the existing ground heights instead
    Absolute  use the ground heights in the scrapbook to replace the existing ground heights
    Relative  use the difference between the existing ground heights and those used in the scrapbook


[edit] Effect Layers

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target paints a selected Effect Layer into your Trainz World


Effect Layers allow you to create and add special scenery effects to your Trainz World. There are four different types of Effect Layers you can add:-
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX -  only works on Nvidia graphic cards and Windows systems . TurfFX consists of 3D animated (e.g. swaying in a breeze) plants that can be used to cover areas of terrain. An example would be a wheat crop. TurfFX layers are painted onto the terrain like a texture and will follow the terrain shape. You can have multiple TurfFX layers.
DotPoint.JPG Clutter - similar to TurfFX but restricted to smaller objects such as ground cover plants and small rocks. Clutter layers are painted onto the terrain like a texture and will follow the terrain shape. You can have multiple Clutter layers.
DotPoint.JPG Water - when added a Water Effect Layer will cover the entire layout and will normally sit below the terrain surface (default height is 0m). Areas of a water layer can be raised up to become visible to form a stream, lake, pond or an ocean. You can have multiple water layers each with different water colours and surface effects (calm, ripples, stormy).
DotPoint.JPG Color -  only available in Trainz Plus when using HD Terrain. The Color Layer allows you to add color tints and lightening/darkening effects to different areas of the terrain. The Color layer sits on the terrain surface but is only visible when it is painted. Only a single Color Layer can be added but it can be painted with different colour effects in different areas.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers are created using the Edit Effect Layers options found in both the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu at the top of the screen and also in the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool Action Drop Down Menu. They can also be loaded from .cdp files and installed from the DLS (Download Station)
DotPoint.JPG Once created Effect Layers can be saved as Presets to be used in other routes


Each effect layer that you add or create will be saved as a seperate layer in the Effect Layers Group in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint.JPG The Effects Layer Group cannot be renamed, deleted, moved or merged with any other layer
DotPoint.JPG Individual effect layers can be renamed, deleted and edited, but not moved or merged with any other layer group
DotPoint.JPG All effect layer edits are performed using the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool, or by selecting the layer in the  Layers Palette , or from the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu


[edit]  Selecting an Existing Effect Layer 

    DownUp      
Effect Layers that you have created for the current route (see PageLink.PNG Edit Effect Layers) or installed into the current route (see PageLink.PNG Loading Preset Effect Layers) will be listed in both the  Layers Palette  and in the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool Action Drop Down Menu.


Ablue.png Selecting an Effect Layer from the Brush Tool:

BrushToolsLoadedEffectLayers S20.png
Step: To select an Effect Layer as the brush tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on an Effect Layer name in the Brush Target List and immediately start painting with the brush using the current  Tool Options Palette  settings. More details are shown below.


NotePad.PNG If no named Effect Layers are present in the Brush Target List then none have been created or loaded


Bblue.png Selecting an Effect Layer from the Layers Palette:

AssetsPaletteEffectLayers S20.png
Step: To select an Effect Layer as the brush tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Layers Palette   Left Click  on an Effect Layer name. You can immediately start painting the effect layer using the current  Tool Options Palette  settings. More details are shown below.


NotePad.PNG If no named Effect Layers are present in the  Layers Palette  then none have been created or loaded


[edit]  Loading Preset Effect Layers 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Preset effect layers are layers that have been created in other routes and saved into Content Manager or downloaded from the DLS
BlueDot10x10.png Preset effect layers can be added to your existing route


For instructions on saving an effect layer as a Preset, see PageLink.PNG Save a Layer as a Preset below.

The quickest method of loading a Preset into a route is to use the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette . Both must be visible on your screen.


Steps: To load a Preset into a route:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  select the Presets icon PresetFilter S20.png (the last icon in the list) or select Presets from the Content Drop Down Menu below the icons
FilterPalettePresetsSelected S20.png The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting Presets in the  Filter Palette  the  Assets Palette  will display a list of all the installed effect layers. For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you can optionally narrow the search results by adding a text string to the  Search  box
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Assets Palette  when the required preset effect layer is shown in the list  Left Click  on its name to select it. The S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool will also be selected and its Brush Target will be set to the selected effect layer so you can immediately start painting using the current  Tool Options Palette  settings
As soon as you start painting the new effect layer will be added to the Effect Layers group in the  Layers Palette .
LayersPaletteEffectLayerRemove S20.png

To remove the new Effect Layer, or any Effect Layer, from the  Layers Palette  Right Click on the layers name and select  Delete Layer  from the pop-up menu.

Stop.PNG WARNING:
Deleting an Effect Layer will delete it from your route


The other options allow you to Rename and Edit the selected Effect Layer
AssetsPalettePresetsSelected S20.png


[edit]  Effect Layer Tool Options 

    DownUpSkipMinorBlank.png      
BlueDot10x10.png You can control how an effect layer is painted into your Trainz World through the settings in the  Tool Options Palette 


PalettesIcon S20.png The Effect Layer brush tool uses the  Tool Options Palette . If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


NotePad.PNG Notes: Tool Options Palette Controls

DotPoint.JPG The active effect layer brush options for each action are shown in the  Tool Options Palette  with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.
DotPoint.JPG Most of the data entry boxes in the  Tool Options Palette  have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 TurfFX and Clutter 
BrushToolsEffectLayer S20.png
 Water 

BrushToolsWaterLayer S20.png

NotePad.PNG Water Effect Grade
The Water Effect Layer  Grade  and  Angle  settings are only active if the  Grade  Brush Action has been selected.
 Color 
BrushToolsColorLayer S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The Color Effect Layer is only available in Trainz Plus
DotPoint.JPG The Water Effect Layer properties of colour and surface effect (calm, ripples, etc) are created using the Edit Effect Layer... controls - see Edit Water Layer below


PencilTips.PNG On the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the value in smaller increments
 Radius  the brush radius (metres)
Range:  Will depend on the effect layer being added. See Notes: below
 Height  the water layer height (metres) as painted by the brush
Range:  -3000m to +3000m
 Sensitivity  the rate at which the Intensity (TurfFX, Clutter, Color) or Height (Water) setting changes under the brush
Range:  1% (very slowly) to
100% (very quickly)
 Intensity  effect density or coverage within the brush
Range:  1% (almost none) to
100% (maximum)
 Grade  Water Effect Layer slope gradient. See Notes: below
Range:  0% (flat) to
100% (steep but not vertical)
 Angle  Water Effect Layer grade direction (compass degrees)
Range:  (North) to ±359°
a negative value reverses the grade direction
 Color  Color Effect Layer colour selection (RGB and Brightness values) - Trainz Plus only
Range: 
BrushToolsColorLayerPicker S20.png
 Left Click  on the coloured box next to the title Color to open the colour selector.
Set a Colour: Select a colour by either:-
DotPoint.JPG a  Left Click  on the colour in the colour picker device, OR
DotPoint.JPG enter its RGB value in Hexadecimal
Optionally: Set a brightness value for the selected colour by moving the slider up or down
Reset:  Left Click  the Reset button (the circular arrow on the bottom right) to cancel your changes and reset the colour to its default value. This default value is set using the Edit Effect Layer... - see Edit Color Effect Layer below
NotePad.PNG The  Height  setting is ignored for TurfFX, Clutter and Color effect layers because these layers will be painted at the existing ground surface height.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases
DotPoint.JPG The minimum brush  Radius  for a TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layer will depend on its configuration settings - the asset density, the resources used, etc. This minimum size will be different for different Effect Layers. If the  Radius  value is below the required minimum for the selected TurfFX or Clutter Effect Layer then the brush circle will turn RED and it will not paint
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


[edit]  TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layers 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png TurfFX and Clutter are Effect Layers that can quickly add vegetation and other ground "artifacts" (e.g. weeds, crops, stones, etc) over large areas
BlueDot10x10.png In a future "soon to be released" TM version of Trainz, TurfFX will be removed as a separate effect layer and become part of an updated Clutter effect layer


Stop.PNG CAUTION:

The TurfFX Effect Layer is:-

DotPoint.JPG an Nvidia product (it is not from N3V) and requires the presence of an Nvidia GPU such as a GTX or RTX video graphics card. The TurfFX Effect Layer will not appear on systems that do not have an Nvidia video card
DotPoint.JPG only supported on MS Windows. It will not work on MacOS systems


 Brush Actions  When a TurfFX or Clutter Effect Layer has been selected as the Target, the second drop down box will give a choice of three actions.
The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Increase
BulletTick.png Decrease
BulletTick.png Set Intensity
EffectLayerActions S20.png
PencilTips.PNG Use the  Tool Options Palette   Intensity  and  Sensitivity  settings to control how the Effect Layer is applied to the terrain by the brush
TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layer Actions:
 Increase  increases the  Tool Options Palette   Intensity  of the effect layer at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting, upto a maximum of 100%. Each time the brush is moved over the same area the Intensity or Density of the effect layer is increased
 Decrease  decreases the  Tool Options Palette   Intensity  of the effect layer at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting. Each time the brush is moved over the same area the Intensity or Density of the effect layer is decreased
 Set Intensity  will paint the effect layer in one sweep using the full  Tool Options Palette   Intensity  setting


Steps: To paint with a TurfFX or Clutter Effect Layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the <TurfFX effect layer name> or the <Clutter effect layer name> from the Brush Target drop down menu. If there are no TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers listed then none have been created or installed for this route
PencilTips.PNG You can also perform the above two steps in a single step by selecting the named Effect Layer in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint3.JPG select a Brush action from the second Drop Down Menu ( Increase ,  Decrease  or  Set Intensity )
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any required Brush settings -  Radius ,  Intensity  and  Sensitivity 
DotPoint5.JPG  Left Click  or Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint with the selected Effect Layer.  Note: If the brush painting circle is RED then the effect layer will not paint because the brush  Radius  is too small 
PencilTips.PNG Both TurfFX and Clutter use LOD data so their visual effect will decrease the further away they are from your point of view. So there is no advantage, but there is a possible performance disadvantage, in painting these effect layers right out to the horizon


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The density or coverage of the TurfFX and Clutter ground effects within the brush area is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Intensity  setting.

Gears.PNG  Intensity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% to apply the effect very lightly
BlackDot10x10.png 100% to apply the effect at full density
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area

DotPoint.JPG The rate or speed at which the TurfFX and Clutter ground effects change when using the  Increase  or  Decrease  brush actions is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting.

Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% to increase/decrease the application of the ground effect very slowly when you move the brush
BlackDot10x10.png 100% increase/decrease the application of the ground effect at the maximum possible rate when you move the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area


NotePad.PNG Notes: "Floating Turf"
When painting with a TurfFX Effect Layer or a Clutter Effect Layer brush, care must be taken when near the edge of the route. Painting over the edge will create "floating" effect layer artifacts. This can occur in both Surveyor 2.0 and Surveyor Classic. The same effect will occur if an effect layer is painted over a dig-hole, such as those used at tunnel entrances.
EffectLayerHeightArtifact.png In the image on the left, a TurfFX Effect Layer brush has been used near the boundary of the route. Some of the brush has strayed over that boundary edge into the empty space beyond.

The result is a "floating" section of TurfFX or Clutter hovering "off the grid" and sometimes high above the terrain, as shown in the image. The height of the floating region will depend on the ground height, the World Origin height and other mysterious factors.

The Solution: (The Lawn Mower)

Steps: To remove "floating" TurFX and Clutter:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  set the Effect Brush Tool action to  Decrease 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set both the  Intensity  and  Sensitivity  settings in the  Tool Options Palette  to 100%
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Layers Palette  select the same Effect Layer that created the problem, repaint over the floating Effect Layer areas. This will also remove some of the effect layer from the edges of the boundary baseboards.


PencilTips.PNG Prevention:
DotPoint.JPG DO NOT paint TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layers right up to the edges of boundary baseboards
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX and Clutter Layers do not detect and avoid dig-holes such as those used at tunnel entrances. Use the steps listed above to remove effect layers from dig-holes


[edit]  Water Effect Layer 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Water Effect Layer will cover the entire route but different parts can be raised above the ground to reveal the water where required
BlueDot10x10.png You can have more than one Water Effect Layer each with a different colour and/or surface effect (calm, ripples, rough) to simulate different water features (e.g. pond, lake, stream, ocean)
BlueDot10x10.png The Ground Height can also be raised or lowered to hide and reveal the water layer where required


 Brush Actions  When a Water Effect Layer has been selected as the Target, the second drop down box will give a choice of five actions. These actions are identical to those found in the  Ground Height  Target plus a new action:-
The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Height Up
BulletTick.png Height Down
BulletTick.png Set Height
BulletTick.png Grade
BulletTick.png Bulk Adjust
BrushToolsWaterEffect S20.png
PencilTips.PNG Use the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity   Height   Grade  and  Angle  settings to control how the Water Effect Layer is applied
Water Effect Layer Actions:
 Height Up   Height Down  raises/lowers the water layer at a rate controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting
 Set Height  will "plateau" the water level to the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting
 Grade  creates a smooth water slope at the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  and  Angle  settings at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting - see Notes: below
 Bulk Adjust  will move the entire water layer up or down - see Notes: below


Steps: To paint with a Water Effect Layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the <water effect layer name> from the Brush Target drop down menu. If there are no Water Effect Layers listed then none have been created or installed for this route
PencilTips.PNG You can also perform the above two steps in a single step by selecting the named Effect Layer in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint3.JPG select a Brush action from the second Drop Down Menu ( Height Up ,  Height Down ,  Set Height ,  Grade  or  Set Bulk Adjust )
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any required Brush settings -  Radius ,  Height ,  Sensitivity ,  Grade  and  Angle 
NotePad.PNG The colour and surface effect (calm, ripples, rough) of a Water Effect Layer are set in its properties (see PageLink.PNG Water Layer Edit Controls below)
DotPoint5.JPG  Left Click  or Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint with the Effect Layer
 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The rate or speed at which the water layer height changes under the brush is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting


Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% for the smallest possible change with each sweep of the brush
BlackDot10x10.png 100% for the largest possible change with each sweep of the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG It is NOT recommended that you use both Water Effect Layers and the original Legacy Water in the same route. Use one or the other but, where possible, avoid using both.
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  setting is the vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (e.g. a waterfall) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.
DotPoint.JPG The  Bulk Adjust  action is not fully intuitive and will require some experimentation. It will raise and lower the water effect layer in the baseboard where the Left Click and Drag was executed. Areas within that baseboard where the water effect layer had previously been set to a different height will not be affected until the water level reaches the same height. The Water Effect Layer in surrounding baseboards will also start to move when the level reaches their current heights. Also note that the speed at which the layer moves up or down will decrease as the size of the route increases. In a very large route there may not be any noticeable movement at all. In this case it may be easier to delete the Water Effect Layer and create another one at the new height


Water Effect Layer Example

EffectLayerAddWaterLayer S20.png A water layer has been lifted above the terrain by using the  Tools Palette :-
DotPoint.JPG The S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool target is set to the Water Layer
DotPoint.JPG The Brush Action is set to  Set Height 
... and the  Tool Options Palette :-
DotPoint.JPG  Height  is set to a few metres above the terrain height
The brush painting action is then used to paint the water at the set height.


[edit]  Water Effect Layer Tips 

    DownUp      
PencilTips.PNG The first step with using a Water Effect Layer is to create it at the correct height
See PageLink.PNG Edit a Water Effect Layer below for the details on creating a Water Effect Layer.
DotPoint.JPG When you create a new Water Effect Layer it will cover the entire route at the default height of 0 metres. Depending on the starting height of your route (which is set in the very first baseboard) this may be too high and place the water layer above the route and drown everything.
DotPoint.JPG Once you create a Water Effect Layer its height cannot be altered by editing its properties (see PageLink.PNG Edit a Water Effect Layer below) and the  Bulk Adjust  option in the Brush Actions for the Water Effect Layer is extremely slow and inefficient when used on large routes.
Steps: When creating a new Water Effect Layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG Locate the lowest ground height in your route. Take note of its altitude by placing the Compass on the lowest spot and read its height value in the  Info Palette
DotPoint2.JPG Set the default water height in the Water Effect Layer Edit Properties window to slightly below (e.g. 1 metre below) that height. If the minimum ground height is above 0 metres then you can safely leave the default height at 0 metres

PencilTips.PNG To create a flat water layer at a set height use the following technique:-
Steps: To Create a Flat Water Surface:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Water Effect Layer in the  Layers Palette. This will also select that same layer in the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the  Set Height  brush action rather than  Height Up/Height Down  actions
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set the  Height  to the required value so that the water will be visible above the ground surface and the  Sensitivity  to 100%
DotPoint4.JPG Paint with the brush to bring the Water Effect Layer up to the set height

PencilTips.PNG To create a sloping water layer use the following technique:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Water Effect Layer in the  Layers Palette. This will also select that same effect layer in the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the  Grade  brush action
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set the  Grade  and the  Angle  to the required values
DotPoint4.JPG Paint with the brush to create the Water Effect Layer surface at the set gradient adjusting the slope direction ( Angle ) when required


[edit]  Color Effect Layer 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Color Effect Layer is only available to Trainz Plus subscribers and can only be applied to routes using HD grid
BlueDot10x10.png The Color Effect Layer adds a "tinting effect" to selected areas of the route
BlueDot10x10.png Only one Color Effect Layer can be added to a route but it can have different colours in different parts of the route


 Brush Actions  When the Color Effect Layer has been selected as the Brush Target, the second drop down box will be blank as there are no brush actions for this effect layer.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Color Effect Layer is only available in routes using HD Grid. You can add the effect layer to a route that uses 5m Grid and/or 10m Grid but the layer will only appear if the route is converted to HD Grid


PencilTips.PNG You can think of the Color Effect Layer as a transparent "skin" that covers the ground texture throughout the layout. You can add different colours (or "tints") to the skin at different places to alter the appearance of the ground texture below.


BrushToolsColorLayer S20.png
Steps: To paint with a Color Effect Layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool or press the  W  key
DotPoint2.JPG select the <color effect layer name> from the Brush Target drop down menu. If there are no Color Effect Layers listed then none have been created or installed for this route
PencilTips.PNG You can also perform the above two steps in a single step by selecting the named Effect Layer in the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  set any required Brush settings -  Radius ,  Sensitivity  and  Color 
NotePad.PNG The  Color  setting will open the color picker to select the colour to be painted. See PageLink.PNG Effect Layer Tool Options above.
DotPoint4.JPG  Left Click  or Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint the Effect Layer with the selected colour
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The rate or speed at which the colour changes under the brush is controlled by the  Tool Options Palette   Sensitivity  setting

Gears.PNG  Sensitivity  Settings:
BlackDot10x10.png 1% for the smallest possible change with each sweep of the brush
BlackDot10x10.png 100% for the largest possible change with each sweep of the brush
Values between these two limits will give intermediate changes with each sweep of the brush over the same area

DotPoint.JPG Applying a Color Effect Layer will only affect the appearance (colours) of the ground textures in the painted area. It will not affect the appearance of any objects placed on the ground in that area


No color effect layer applied Color effect layer applied
ColorEffectLayerNoTint.png ColorEffectLayerTint.png
Cricket pitch scene before and after applying a color effect layer that gives the impression of "wear and tear" around the pitch area


[edit] Edit Effect Layers...

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
When this Brush Target is selected, the Edit Effect Layer dialogue box will appear. This is the same as selecting  Edit Effect Layers ...  from the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu.


 Brush Actions  When the  Edit Effect Layers...  Target is selected, the second drop down box will be disabled - there are no actions for this brush target.


Open effect layers Option Ablue.png Create a New Effect Layer
If no Effect Layers are present then you can create a new one
New effect layer
Steps: To create your first effect layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  in the  Effect Name  text box and enter a name for your new Effect Layer
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Effect Type  drop down box and select the type of Effect Layer to be created -  TurfFX   Clutter   Water  or  Color 
NotePad.PNG The Color Effect Layer is only available in Trainz Plus
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the Tick.PNG icon
You will then be presented with Option Bblue.png as shown below. You will probably need to edit your new Effect Layer
Option Bblue.png Edit an Existing Effect Layer
If Effect Layers are present (including the one you just created in Option Ablue.png above) then select an Effect Layer to edit, delete or choose to create another new one
Edit effect layers
 Preset:  this drop down box will list all the Preset Effect Layers that have been loaded into Content Manager. Select a Preset to load it into the route
SavePresetIcon.png Save as a Preset - this icon will save the Effect Layer as a Preset. See PageLink.PNG Save a Layer as a Preset below.
EditSwitchIcon.png Edit Effect Layer - this icon will open and close the editing dialogue area that allows you to alter the appearance and properties of your selected Effect Layer.
Edit with  CAUTION 
DotPoint.JPG to create a new effect layer  Left Click  on the PlusIcon.png icon - then follow the steps in Option Ablue.png above
DotPoint.JPG to select an existing layer to edit, either select its name from the Layer drop down box OR  Left Click  on the PickerIcon.png icon and select the Effect Layer from the Trainz World
DotPoint.JPG to delete an effect layer from the route first select it (as described above) and then  Left Click  on the DeleteIcon.png icon


PencilTips.PNG Effect Layers are created for each route. You can select and edit a previously saved Effect Layer (called a Preset) rather than having to recreate the entire effect each time.


When you have finished creating or editing an Effect Layer click either the:-
Tick.PNG icon to accept your changes OR Cross.PNG icon to reject your changes


[edit]  Save a Layer as a Preset 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A Preset is an edited or created effect layer that has been saved so that it can be reused in other routes
Once an effect layer has been created or edited, it can be saved and will appear as a new asset in Content Manager. It can be loaded into other routes (see PageLink.PNG Loading Preset Effect Layers above), saved as a .cdp file and uploaded to the DLS.
Edit effect layers
Steps: To save an effect layer as a Preset:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the Effect Layers window and select the effect layer to be saved
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the SavePresetIcon.png icon. The effect layer will be saved using the name you entered for the layer (Grass Short Dry in the example shown on the left)
NotePad.PNG Notes:

A Preset can be deleted from the current route ( Left Click  on the DeleteIcon.png icon) but it will remain as a saved asset in Content Manager and can be reloaded if needed. To permanently delete a preset it must be deleted using Content Manager


[edit]  TurfFX Layer Edit Controls 

    DownUp      
EditEffectLayerTurfFX S20.png
Stop.PNG WARNING:

Always edit these values with caution
The TurfFX Effect Layer is:-

DotPoint.JPG an Nvidia product (it is not from N3V) and requires the presence of an Nvidia GPU such as a GTX or RTX video graphics card. The TurfFX Effect Layer will not appear on systems that do not have an Nvidia video card
DotPoint.JPG only supported on MS Windows. It will not work on MacOS systems


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Many of the entered values will alter the appearance of the asset. Features such as the ground coverage (density) of the plants, their heights, stem and leaf thickness, density of seed heads, etc, etc


LinkWiki.PNG

A detailed (but incomplete) description of the TurfFX Effect Layer controls can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

TurfFX_Effect_Layer


PencilTips.PNG The best way to learn how to create and edit an effect layer is to set up a single baseboard and experiment with the various options and controls. If your experiments create an effect layer that you like then save it as a Preset so that it can be used in another route.


[edit]  Clutter Layer Edit Controls 

    DownUp      
EditEffectLayerClutter S20.png
Stop.PNG WARNING:
Always edit these values with caution
The scenery assets you select to be included in a Clutter Effect Layer:-
DotPoint.JPG should be small. Ideally they should fit inside a 1m cube
DotPoint.JPG MUST have LOD (Levels Of Detail) built-in. Assets with no LOD or poor LOD will cause performance issues.
Built-in scenery assets that contain the word clutter in their names (such as shown in the image on the left) will meet the above two requirements


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Each added Mesh Asset (e.g. plant asset or rock asset) will increase the resources used by this layer and that may have an effect on performance.
DotPoint.JPG The sliders next to each Mesh Asset control the density (frequency) of that asset in the layer.
Extreme Left not displayed at all. This will add a Delete icon to the end of the slider which will allow that asset to be removed from the layer
Extreme Right displayed with maximum coverage
Intermediate positions along a slider will give effects between these two extremes


LinkWiki.PNG

A detailed description of the Clutter Effect Layer controls can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

Clutter_Effect_Layer


PencilTips.PNG The best way to learn how to create and edit an effect layer is to set up a single baseboard and experiment with the various options and controls. If your experiments create an effect layer that you like then save it as a Preset so that it can be used in another route


[edit]  Water Layer Edit Controls 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Water Effect Layer has been introduced mainly for Surveyor 2.0 although an older and more restricted version is available in TRS19 SP4


In Surveyor 2.0 you can have more than one Water Effect Layer. Each can have a different combination of water colour and surface effects (calm, ripples, rough). Each can be raised above the ground height to present a different water surface in different locations.


EditEffectLayerWater S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The  Default Value  control sets the initial height or altitude in metres of the entire water effect layer. This is initially set to 0m but you can change this to any positive (above) or negative (below) value BUT this must be set when the layer is created, not edited afterwards when it will have no effect
DotPoint.JPG The  Constant Value  controls set the colour of the entire water effect layer. Enter the RGB colour values (0.000 to 1.000) for the required colour
Stop.PNG WARNING:

Always edit these values with caution
A Water Effect Layer:-

DotPoint.JPG will be automatically added at an altitude of 0m (the  Default Value ) when you create a new Route
DotPoint.JPG will appear if you lower the ground surface below the altitude of the layer


LinkWiki.PNG

The Trainz Wiki has an old (TRS19) and very incomplete description of the Water Effect Layer controls at:-

Water_Effect_Layer


PencilTips.PNG The best way to learn how to create and edit an effect layer is to set up a single baseboard and experiment with the various options and controls. If your experiments create an effect layer that you like then save it as a Preset so that it can be used in another route.


[edit]  Color Layer Edit Controls 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Color Effect Layer is only available to Trainz Plus subscribers
BlueDot10x10.png It can only be used in routes built with HD Grid


You can only have one Color Effect Layer but through the  Tool Options Palette  it can be given different colours in different locations.


EditEffectLayerColor S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG The  Default Value  RGB colours will set the initial colour used and the colour that will be set if the Reset button is clicked in the  Tool Options Palette  while painting a colour. Enter the RGB colour values (0.000 to 1.000) for the required colour
DotPoint.JPG The Color Effect Layer can be created in a route that uses 5m Grid or 10m Grid but it will only appear if the entire route is converted to HD Grid. See PageLink.PNG Converting to HD
Stop.PNG WARNING:

Always edit these values with caution

DotPoint.JPG only one color effect layer can be added to a Route
DotPoint.JPG the color effect layer only works when using HD resolution


LinkWiki.PNG

A more detailed description of the Color Effect Layer controls can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

Color_effect_layer


PencilTips.PNG The best way to learn how to create and edit an effect layer is to set up a single baseboard and experiment with the various options and controls. If your experiments create an effect layer that you like then save it as a Preset so that it can be used in another route.


[edit] The Placement Tool

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  E 
The  Placement Tool  adds selected assets to a Trainz World


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Tool Options Palette   Layers Palette   Info Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Placement Tools
 Tool Targets  The Placement Tool has no Target options so it has no drop down menu list
DotPoint.JPG When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easy to identify that the Placement Tool is active PlacementToolPointer S20.png
DotPoint.JPG Selecting an asset in the  Assets Palette  or an effect layer in the  Layers Palette  will automatically activate the Placement Tool
 Tool Actions  The Placement Tool has no Action options so it has no drop down menu list


PencilTips.PNG More Placement Options
After an object has been placed in a route its position and/or height can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png using the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Cblue.png editing its  x:   y:   z:  settings in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Dblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu. This will apply the  Height  value stored in the  Tool Options Palette  to the object


[edit] Placement: Setting an Objects Name and Layer

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
Once an object has been placed into the Trainz World using the Placement Tool it can be given an optional name and, if needed, moved to a different layer.

[edit]  Setting an Objects Name 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Object names are optional but for some objects they are essential for running a session
You can give any object in your route an identifying name. In some cases a name is vital for AI and session operations, in other cases it will be needed as a display feature - for example: to be shown on a station nameboard. A name also makes it easier to search for a particular object using the Finder Tool ( Ctrl  +  F  keys). You must have an object selected before it can be named


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


InfoPaletteObjectName S20.png
Steps: To name (or rename) a selected object:-
 Note:  This must be performed immediately after the object has been placed while it is still highlighted (selected). If the object is not highlighted then select it with the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Info Palette   Left Click  inside the Name text entry box
DotPoint2.JPG Enter a name
DotPoint3.JPG Press the  Enter  key


ObjectsUsingSameName.png
There is no ban on two or more objects using the same name


In the image shown on the left there are 4 objects all named Old Orroroo Rd.

This will not cause any problems for scenery objects apart from finding the exact one you want with the Finder Tool ( Ctrl  +  F  keys) as shown in the image on the left - Which of the 4 "Old Orroroo Rd" objects is the one that I need?

Stop.PNG WARNING:
Duplicate names will cause problems for Industries (including passenger enabled stations), Locomotives, Track Marks, Triggers, Switches, Signals, etc that have to be identified to control the operation of a session.
These objects must have unique names


[edit]  Setting an Objects Layer 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png All objects in the Trainz World are in layers. You can set and change the layers where objects are placed
An object will always be placed in the currently set Active Layer. The active layer can be changed before the object has been added and objects can be moved to different layers at any time.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Layers Palette  and the  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


LayersPalette S20 ActiveLayer3.png
The Active Layer (shown left named route-layer PQ) is indicated by a light grey "highlight" in the list and its name will appear in the  Layers Palette  title.  This is the layer where all objects added by the Placement Tool and the Scrapbook will be placed 


Step: To set the Active Layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Layers Palette   Left Click  on the layer name. That layer is now the Active Layer where all objects placed in the Route or Session will be added. You can change the Active Layer at any time.
NotePad.PNG Changing the Active Layer will not change the assigned layers of any existing objects. It merely sets the default layer that will be used for new added objects


NotePad.PNG The Ground Height, Ground Texture and Effect Layers are special. They cannot be set as the Active Layer and scenery objects and splines cannot be moved into them.


BlueDot10x10.png After an object has been placed into a layer in the Trainz World it can be moved to a different layer


If an object is still selected (highlighted) by the Placement Tool then you can change its assigned layer as often as you like. If it is not selected then you must first select it using either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool.
InfoLayerSetNew.png
Steps: To move a placed object to another layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Info Palette   Left Click  on the Layer arrowhead icon (circled in red in the image left). This will open up the layer controls for the selected object
DotPoint2.JPG the drop down menu box labelled Layer shows the currently assigned layer for that object.  Left Click  on the Up/Down arrows to open the list of all available layers.
DotPoint3.JPG select the destination layer from the list. The object will then be moved to the selected layer - you will be given a warning if the move has failed (usually because the objects layer is locked)
NotePad.PNG Also see:-
PageLink.PNG Assigning Objects to a Different Layer for more details on the Layer Controls in the  Info Palette 
WikiLink.PNG How to Use Layers for detailed information on Layers


[edit] Placement: Scenery Mesh Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
MeshObjectExamples.png

Typical Scenery Mesh Objects

Buildings, trees, bushes, vehicles, people, "clutter"


[edit]  Placement: Add a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownSkipMinorUp.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery Mesh Objects include single (non-spline) scenery items such as buildings, trees, road signs, cars (non moving), people and animals


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Steps: To add a Scenery Mesh Object the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add.


DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  choose one of the following:-
Options:
 Left Click  on the Scenery Mesh icon

FilterPaletteSceneryObjectsSelected S20.png

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
 Left Click  the Content Drop Down Menu

FilterPaletteNoIconSelected S20.png
Then select Scenery Objects
Scenery Objects

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
Steps: If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1RedC.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a  ToolTip  attached to the pointer
DotPoint2RedC.png while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object. This will automatically select it in the  Assets Palette  and it will also select the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below


DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  the Scenery Objects icon will be shown in blue when it is selected and the name Scenery Objects will appear in the drop down box below the icons. For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting  Scenery Object  in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed Scenery Objects in the  Assets Palette . For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option to narrow down the filtered list. Type the assets name or part of the name into the  Search  box. For example if you have selected Scenery Objects and want to find "wooden barns", then type "wooden barn" (UPPER/lower case does not matter) - the part names "wooden" or "barn" would also work but will produce longer lists.

This will list all the Scenery Objects containing the text "wooden barn" in their names or descriptions.
AssetsPaletteMeshSearchWoodenBarn S20.png
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Assets Palette   Left Click  on the required item in the list. When selected the asset will be highlighted with a light grey background.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

A  Left Click  on an asset in the  Assets Palette  filtered list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next  Left Click  will place that asset in your Trainz World.


PencilTips.PNG If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View ( Left Click  the AssetsPaletteListToggleViewIcon S20.png icon). In this view the palette is best used undocked and enlarged - see the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for instructions on undocking and enlarging palettes.


DotPoint4.JPG The final step is to place the selected asset into the route.


Steps:
DotPoint1RedC.png In the  Tools Palette  if, for some reason, the Placement Tool is not selected then  Left Click  on its icon S20 PlacementToolIcon.png or press the  E  key
DotPoint2RedC.png  Left Click  at the spot where you want to place the asset


PencilTips.PNG Holding down the  Ctrl  key when you  Left Click  at the spot will allow you to drag the object to a different position before it is released
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you  Left Click  another copy of the asset (or another asset if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Placement: Move a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownUp      
Warning:
Stop.PNG To move a scenery mesh object  DO NOT  click on it with the Placement Tool as this will just add another object


PencilTips.PNG To move scenery mesh objects you must switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool OR the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


Steps: To move a scenery mesh object
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool (or press the  S  key) or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool (or press the  D  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select ( Left Click ) on the object to be moved. To select multiple objects use  Shift  +  Left Click  on each object
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click and Drag  the object(s) in the required direction
For more information see the sections PageLink.PNG Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects or PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects


[edit]  Placement: Delete a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownUp      
To delete a scenery mesh object (or any object) that has just been added by the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool and is still highlighted, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) and select the option  Delete 
NotePad.PNG If the object is not highlighted then you must first switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool, select the object and then choose one of the above options


[edit]  Placement: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png An object that has just been added to a route using the Placement Tool can have its height adjusted immediately after placement
BlueDot10x10.png or it can be adjusted at a later time using the Free Move or Fine Adjustment Tools


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Get the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting while the Placement Tool is still active. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
Steps: To copy the height of any selected object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click in the  Height  setting
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option
 
You can check the height of any selected object or endpoint using the  Info Palette . The height is the last value in the Pos: (Position) data set.
InfoPaletteShowHeight S20.png


Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object
In Surveyor 2.0 scenery mesh objects can be given a height that can place them above or below the ground level.

PlacementMeshHeight0 S20.png PlacementMeshHeight3 S20.png
To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png In the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Bblue.png In the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  Pos:   z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).
The object will be moved to the set height above (or below) the terrain. The vertical yellow line shown in the second image on the left indicates the height change. The small yellow dot at the base of the line is the terrain attachment point for the object.


[edit]  Placement: Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu Options

Once a scenery mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following Scenery Mesh Object specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the objects Context Menu.


 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
See PageLink.PNG Free Move: Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu for the full list of Context Menu options for Scenery Mesh Objects.


[edit] Placement: Spline Objects (Including Track)

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
SplineObjectExamples.png

Typical Spline Objects

Corrugated iron fence, hedge, sidewalk, power lines, road, rail track


[edit]  Placement: Add a Spline Object 

    DownSkipMinorUp.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of segments joined at the endpoints.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Steps: To add a Scenery Splines or Track Splines the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add.


DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  choose one of the following:-
Ablue.png For Scenery Splines
Options:
 Left Click  on the Scenery Spline icon

FilterPaletteScenerySplinesSelected S20.png

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
 Left Click  the Content Drop Down Menu

FilterPaletteNoIconSelected S20.png
Then select Scenery Splines
FilterSelectScenerySplines S20.png

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
Steps: If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1RedC.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a  ToolTip  attached to the pointer
DotPoint2RedC.png while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object. This will automatically select it in the  Assets Palette  and it will also select the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below
DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  the Scenery Splines icon will be shown in blue when it is selected and the name Scenery Splines will appear in the drop down box below the icons. For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting  Scenery Splines  in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed Scenery Splines in the  Assets Palette . For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


Bblue.png For Track Splines
Options:
 Left Click  on the Track Spline icon

FilterPaletteTrackSelected S20.png

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
 Left Click  the Content Drop Down Menu

FilterPaletteNoIconSelected S20.png
Then select Scenery Splines
FilterSelectTrack S20.png

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
Steps: If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1RedC.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a  ToolTip  attached to the pointer
DotPoint2RedC.png while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object. This will automatically select it in the  Assets Palette  and it will also select the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below
DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  the Track icon will be shown in blue when it is selected and the name Track will appear in the drop down box below the icons. For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting  Track  in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed Track Splines in the  Assets Palette . For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option to narrow down the filtered list. Type the assets name or part of the name into the  Search  box. For example if you have selected Track and want to find track splines with "NG42" in their names, then type "NG42" (UPPER/lower case does not matter).

This will list all the Track containing the text "NG42" in their names or descriptions.
AssetsPaletteTrackSearchNG42 S20.png
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Assets Palette   Left Click  on the required item in the list. When selected the asset will be highlighted with a light grey background.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

A  Left Click  on an asset in the  Assets Palette  filtered list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next  Left Click  will place that asset in your Trainz World.


PencilTips.PNG If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View ( Left Click  the AssetsPaletteListToggleViewIcon S20.png icon). In this view the palette is best used undocked and enlarged - see the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for instructions on undocking and enlarging palettes.


DotPoint4.JPG Place the starting point of the selected spline or track into the route.


Steps:
DotPoint1RedC.png In the  Tools Palette  if, for some reason, the Placement Tool is not selected then  Left Click  on its icon S20 PlacementToolIcon.png or press the  E  key
DotPoint2RedC.png  Left Click  at the spot where you want to Start the spline
PencilTips.PNG If the spline starting point is on another spline and you do not want the two splines to be joined then hold down the  Shift  key when you  Left Click 
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you  Left Click  another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


PlacementTrack1 S20.png DotPoint5.JPG Move the mouse in the direction you want to lay the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
DotPoint.JPG When you start adding a spline to a route it will always be placed at the height of the terrain regardless of the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting.
DotPoint.JPG If there is a % value in the  Grade  setting then the spline will be laid down with a slope using that grade value starting from the terrain height at the first endpoint. If you don't want a grade and want each endpoint placed at the terrain height then delete any value stored in the  Grade  setting.


PlacementTrack2 S20.png DotPoint6.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the first spline segment,  Left Click  again. This will anchor the second spline endpoint. The spline between the two endpoints is the first spline segment.
PencilTips.PNG If the spline end point is on another spline and you do not want the two splines to be joined then hold down the  Shift  key when you  Left Click 

The spline segment will now have three Context Icons, one for each endpoint (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png) and one for the spline segment (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png or TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png depending on the type of spline).

NotePad.PNG Different context menu options are provided depending on whether you click on the icon for an endpoint or a segment. See PageLink.PNG Free Move: Spline Object Context Menus for more details
PlacementTrack3 S20.png DotPoint7.JPG  Left Click  on the new endpoint and move the mouse in the direction you want to continue laying the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
NotePad.PNG Notes: Curves for Trainz Geekz

Splines and track splines are created and stored using Bezier Curves, a mathematical formula commonly used for curves in computer graphics. Each spline segment, curved or straight, is described using just 4 points regardless of its length and complexity. This gives significant savings in storage and processing. Unfortunately, real world curves are rarely described by simple Bezier Curves. This can sometimes create difficulties when modelling curves from the real world so approximations often have to be used in the Trainz World.
PlacementTrack4 S20.png DotPoint8.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the second spline segment,  Left Click  again. This will anchor the third spline endpoint and the Context Icons will move to the new segment.
NotePad.PNG Notes: Adding a Junction

To add a junction to a spline segment  Left Click  on it with the Placement Tool at the point where you want to insert the junction, this does not have to be an endpoint, then move the pointer out from the junction. See PageLink.PNG Add a Spline Junction below
Repeat Steps DotPoint7.JPG and DotPoint8.JPG above to continue laying the spline.


[edit] Spine Laying Tips

PencilTips.PNG Starting/Ending Disconnected Splines On Other Splines
BlueDot10x10.png If you start or end a spline segment on another identical or compatible spline it will form a junction (see PageLink.PNG Add a Spline Junction below) or, if close enough, it will attach itself to a nearby endpoint on that spline. This is perfect if that is what you want but it is an annoyance if it is not what you want.
BlueDot10x10.png If you start or end a spline segment on an incompatible spline (e.g. placing a ruler spline endpoint on a road spline) you will receive a warning message such as  Incompatible Spline  and you will not be able to add the segment.

To prevent a junction/join forming or a segment being rejected, use the following technique:-

DotPoint.JPG Hold down the  Shift  key when performing the  Left Click  (a  Shift  +  Left Click ) on the second spline. If this is the start of a spline then once you have clicked draw the new spline out as you normally would

PencilTips.PNG Lay a Spline that Follows the Ground Terrain

Normally splines will be laid down so that they follow the shape of the ground terrain. Occasionally they may be laid down at a set gradient that will ignore the shape of the ground terrain between the two endpoints. This can happen if you have used the Eyedropper Tool to select an existing spline object - the eyedropper will copy some of the features of the selected spline (such as its gradient) into the  Tool Options Palette . If you want the spline to follow the ground terrain, not a set gradient, then use the following:-

DotPoint.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  check the  Grade  setting. If it is showing a % value (e.g. 0% which means "flat") then highlight the value and delete it. It should now show the  -  character (which means "no gradient will be applied")


[edit]  Placement: Move a Spline Object 

    DownUp      
Warning:
Stop.PNG To move a spline object  DO NOT  click on it with the Placement Tool as this will just add a junction


PencilTips.PNG To move spline objects you must switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool OR the PageLink.PNG The Fine Ajustment Tool


Steps: To move a spline segment
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool (or press the  S  key) or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool (or press the  D  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select ( Left Click ) on the spline segment to be moved. To select multiple spline segments use  Shift  +  Left Click  on each segment
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click and Drag  the segment(s) in the required direction
NotePad.PNG Note: always drag on a segment not on an endpoint otherwise only the endpoint will be moved
For more information see the sections PageLink.PNG Free Move: Spline Objects or PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects
 
Steps: To move a spline endpoint
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool (or press the  S  key) or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool (or press the  D  key)
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click and Drag  the endpoint in the required direction
For more information see the sections PageLink.PNG Free Move: Spline Objects or PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects


[edit]  Placement: Delete a Spline Object 

    DownUp      
To delete a spline object (or any object) that has just been added by the Placement Tool and is still highlighted, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) and select the option  Delete 
NotePad.PNG If the object is not highlighted then you must first switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool, select the object and then choose one of the above options


[edit]  Placement: Add a Spline Junction 

    DownUp      

BlueDot10x10.png A junction is formed when three spline segments are joined at an endpoint. Junctions can be formed using non identical but compatible spline objects, such as different types of track splines.


SplineJunction S20.png
Steps: To add a junction to a spline object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline object to be used for the junction. The easiest method is hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on an existing spline object that you want to use. This will also select the Placement Tool in Step  2  below so you can skip to Step  3 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the Placement Tool S20 PlacementToolIcon.png
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the spline at the spot where the junction is to be created. This can be on an existing endpoint or between two endpoints where a new endpoint will be inserted
NotePad.PNG All spline junctions will be shown with a red dot (DotPoint.JPG). The only exception is for procedural track junctions where a red dot indicates a poorly formed junction while a black dot indicates a correctly formed junction. See PageLink.PNG Add a Track Junction below for more details
DotPoint4.JPG move the mouse pointer out from the junction to where the next endpoint of the spline branch will be placed and  Left Click 


Steps: To remove a junction but keep all its spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG open the junction endpoint Context Menu by a  Left Click  on its Context Icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Separate Splines  menu option (this will separate ALL the spline segments that meet at that endpoint)
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG A junction can be removed by deleting any spline segment that connects to it
DotPoint.JPG A junction endpoint can be moved by using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Placement: Add a Track Junction 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A track junction is formed using track splines in the same way as described above but track junctions have additional features


PlacementTrackJunction S20.png
When a junction is created using Track Spline Objects, a junction switch will be automatically added.
DotPoint.JPG the switch will be the one specified in the Region listed in the Route Properties. The region and its switch can be changed by opening the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu and selecting  Edit Route... . If no region has been specified then a default switch (as shown left) will be used
DotPoint.JPG use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to move or delete the switch and to open its Context Menu for editing


LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing a Region can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


NotePad.PNG Using Procedural Tracks
If the track object used is a Procedural Track and the junction is formed with another Procedural Track then the junction endpoint dot will be coloured:-
DotPoint.JPG RED (as shown above) if the junction exceeds the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction. This will not stop the junction from working but it will not display the special features only found in Procedural Tracks, OR
DotPointBlack.JPG BLACK if the junction is within the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction and it will display all the Procedural Track special features
A procedural track junction can be changed from red to black by adjusting the height and/or position (depending on the exact cause of the problem) of the junction endpoint and the endpoints on either side of the junction. See the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Procedural Track for more details
A junction between two non-procedural tracks and between a procedural track and a non-procedural track will always have a red endpoint dot


[edit]  Placement: Set a Spline Height 

    DownUp      
PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and the  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Get the Height of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a spline segment into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper to copy the height (and gradient) of a spline segment
Steps: To copy the Height of a spline segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked with the eyedropper will be copied into the  Height  setting and the spline gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting.
DotPoint.JPG This will also select the clicked object in the  Assets Palette  and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  in your Trainz World
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Height  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Height of the currently active (just placed) spline segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting box
DotPoint2.JPG Select the  Get Height from Selection  option
NotePad.PNG If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


Set the Height of a Spline Object

To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
NotePad.PNG If the selected spline segment has a  Grade  setting then Options Ablue.png Bblue.png and Dblue.png will adjust the height of each endpoint so that the heights will change but the grade will remain the same. Option Cblue.png will set both endpoints to the entered height and the grade will be removed
Ablue.png  Left Click  in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key, OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) select the  Apply Height  option, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  Pos:   z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


[edit]  Placement: Set a Spline Gradient 

    DownUp      
PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and the  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


Get the Grade of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the grade of a spline segment into the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper to copy the grade of any spline segment
Steps: To copy the Grade of a spline segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG This will also change the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  to the object clicked and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  with the Placement Tool
This will also copy the height of the segment at the point it was clicked into the  Height  setting
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Grade  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Grade of the currently active (just placed) spline segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Grade  setting box
DotPoint2.JPG Select the  Get Grade from Selection  option


Set the Grade of a Spline Object

To set the gradient of a selected spline segment (including track) after it has been laid by the Placement Tool, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Grade  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Grade  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png select the  Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  option from the Context Menu for the segment endpoint (not the segment context icon) -  Left Click  on the endpoint Context Icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png to apply the existing grade value. The endpoint that has been selected will be the starting point of the grade.
PencilTips.PNG You can lay a spline object without any applied gradient so that it will follow the existing terrain height. Simply delete its  Grade  value so it resets to the default  -  character


Adding Spline Segments at a Set Gradient

To set and use the gradient of a spline object (including track) before it has been laid by the Placement Tool so that all the spline segments will be added with the set gradient in place, until it is changed or cancelled, then:-
Steps: To lay a spline sequence with a preset gradient:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Assets Palette   Left Click  on the spline asset to be added
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  in the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Grade  icon is not coloured  Gold 
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  in the Surveyor World and draw out each spline segment as normal. Each segment will have the height of its second endpoint increased (or reduced for a negative grade) by an amount controlled by the  Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNG You can cancel or change the gradient at any time. The change will only affect any selected spline segment and any additional segments that are added after the change. Simply delete its  Grade  value so it resets to the default  -  or enter a new value


[edit]  Placement: Set Track Condition and Superelevation 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Condition sets the "smoothness" of the ride over a track segment. The default is 50% which is Average
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Superelevation sets the height difference (as a angle) between the inner and outer rail lines on a curve
BlueDot10x10.png Track Condition and Superelevation are only available for Track Splines


Track Condition

PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


There are three different methods available for setting the track condition of a track segment.

Ablue.png The  Tool Options Palette  has a Condition setting that only applies to track spline segments. This can be set for a segment that has just been added and is still highlighted.
PlacementSplineTools S20.png
 Condition  this applies to Track Spline objects and sets the track condition (or "ride comfort") for each segment
Range:  1% (terrible track condition) to

50% (average track condition - the default setting) to
100% (perfect track condition)


PencilTips.PNG If the track segment is not highlighted you must switch to the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the Fine Ajustment Tool and then select the segment or multiple segments.


Steps: To set Track Condition:-
DotPoint1.JPG Enter a value from 1 to 100 in the  Tool Options Palette   Condition  setting
DotPoint2.JPG Press the  Enter  key
There will be no visible change to the track appearance, not even for a 1% setting, as this change would have to be built into the track mesh. Instead when a consist moves over the track there will be a visible change in its rocking or swaying motion.


Bblue.png A second method of setting the Track Condition of a newly placed track segment is to use its Track Segment Context Menu.
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png
Steps: To set the Track Condition of a newly placed track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Segment Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a track condition as a % value where it shows Default. The description on the right will change to show the effect of the new value
TrackConditionSetting S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new value and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new value and exit


Cblue.png A third method of setting the Track Condition is to use the Placement Tool to place an invisible track "bump" object on a track segment.
TrackBumpObject.png
The "Track Bump" Object
Steps: To add a Track Bump Object to a track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG Use the  Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette  to locate the Invisible Bump Object.
DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  select the TrackMeshFilter S20.png icon or the asset type Track Objects in the drop down list
DotPoint.JPG In the  Assets Palette  enter the search text Track Bump
DotPoint.JPG  Left Click  on the Invisible Track Bump asset in the asset list
DotPoint2.JPG Place the object on a track segment
DotPoint3.JPG Open its Context Menu and select the last option  Edit Details 
DotPoint4.JPG Enter values for the "bumpy track" settings required
TrackBumpSettings.png

pitch = forward/backward

roll = side to side
DotPoint5.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new values and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new values and exit


Track Superelevation

The Track Superelevation can only be set through the Track Endpoint Context Menu. You can have a different value set for each endpoint that will reflect the changes that can take place around a curve. For more information on how to calculate and use Superelevation see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation
ContextMenuSplineEndPoint S20.png
Steps: To set the Superelevation for an endpoint of a newly placed track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Spline Endpoint Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a Superelevation Degree as an angle (in degrees) - this is the superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint) per degree of curvature where 0 = none
TrackSuperElevationSetting S20.png The Superelevation Angle is calculated using the radius of the curve, the maximum track speed and the track gauge.
See the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation for the formula
DotPoint4.JPG Enter a Superelevation Limit as an angle (in degrees) - this is the maximum allowed superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new values and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new values and exit
Repeat the above steps for each endpoint


[edit]  Placement: Spline Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
Spline Object Context Menu Options

Once a spline segment has been placed you can open its Context Menus. It has separate menus and menu icons:-

DotPoint.JPG SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png or TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png (depending on the type of spline) for the spline segment, and
DotPoint.JPG SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png for the endpoints


 Left Click  on one of the icons to open its menu or press the  T  key to open the menu for the spline segment. The following Spline Object specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the Context Menu.


 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
NotePad.PNG If multiple segments have been selected then this option will break ALL the selected segments into separate (independent) splines
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
See PageLink.PNG Free Move: Spline Object Context Menus for the full list of Context Menu options for Spline Objects.


[edit] Placement: Track Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
TrackObjectExamples.png

Typical Track Objects

Track marks, speed signs, signals (visible and invisible), levers, buffer stops


[edit]  Placement: Add a Track Object 

    DownSkipMinorUp.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (e.g. signals, speed signs, switches, etc), both visible and invisible, can only be attached to track splines.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Visible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Signals, speed signs, end buffers, switches
Invisible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Trackmarks, triggers, direction and priority markers. Plus invisible trackside objects such as signals, switches and speed signs


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Steps: To add a Track Object the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add.


DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  choose one of the following:-

Options:
 Left Click  on the Track Object icon

FilterPaletteTrackObjectsSelected S20.png

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
 Left Click  the Content Drop Down Menu

FilterPaletteNoIconSelected S20.png
Then select Track Objects
FilterSelectTrackObjects S20.png

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
Steps: If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1RedC.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a  ToolTip  attached to the pointer
DotPoint2RedC.png while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object. This will automatically select it in the  Assets Palette  and it will also select the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below
DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  the Track Objects icon will be shown in blue when it is selected and the name Track Objects will appear in the drop down box below the icons. For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting Scenery Objects in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed Track Objects in the  Assets Palette . For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option to narrow down the filtered list. Type the assets name or part of the name into the  Search  box. For example if you have selected Track Objects and want to find track objects named "speed board 50", then type "speedboard50" (UPPER/lower case and spaces between words do not matter).

This will list all the Track Objects containing variations of the texts "speed" + "board" + "50" in their names or descriptions as shown in the image below.
AssetsPaletteTrackObjectSearchSpeed S20.png
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the required item in the list.

When selected the asset will be highlighted with a light grey background.

NotePad.PNG Notes:

A  Left Click  on an object in the  Assets Palette  filtered list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next  Left Click  in your Trainz World will place that object in the scene.


PencilTips.PNG If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View ( Left Click  the AssetsPaletteListToggleViewIcon S20.png icon). In this view the palette is best used undocked and enlarged - see the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for instructions on undocking and enlarging palettes.


DotPoint4.JPG The final step is to place the selected object into the route.
Steps:
DotPoint1RedC.png In the  Tools Palette  if, for some reason, the Placement Tool is not selected then  Left Click  on its icon S20 PlacementToolIcon.png or press the  E  key
DotPoint2RedC.png  Left Click  on the track at the position where you want the Track Object to be placed. This will become the Anchor Point where the object will be attached to the track.
PlacementTrackObject S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you  Left Click  another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


PencilTips.PNG Certain track objects have a Trigger Radius that controls how close a consist must approach the object to trigger its action. See PageLink.PNG Set the Trigger Radius for instructions on setting this feature.


[edit]  Placement: Move a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Once a Track Object (e.g. a signal) has been placed it can be moved using the Placement Tool


Step: To move a Track Object using the Placement Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot in the middle of the track as shown in the image above) to any position along the track or to another track.
NotePad.PNG You can also move the object by dragging the object itself and not its Anchor Point. However, it will lose its fixed distance, both vertical and horizontal, from the centre of the track. You will then have to open its Context Menu and select the  Reattach to Track  option to restore it to the correct distance from the track centre


PencilTips.PNG Moving Track Objects can also be performed, with more control and additional options, using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool.


[edit]  Placement: Delete a Track Object 

    DownUp      
To delete a track object (or any object) that has just been added by the Placement Tool and is still highlighted, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) and select the option  Delete 
NotePad.PNG If the object is not highlighted then you must first switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool, select the object and then choose one of the above options


[edit]  Placement: Set the Height of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png An object that has just been added to a route using the Placement Tool can have its height adjusted immediately after placement
BlueDot10x10.png or it can be adjusted at a later time using the Free Move or Fine Adjustment Tools


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  or the  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Get the Height of a Track Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track object (e.g. a signal) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting while the Placement Tool is still active. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
Steps: To copy the height of any selected track object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click in the  Height  setting
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option
 
You can check the height of any selected object or endpoint using the  Info Palette . The height is the last value in the Pos: (Position) data set.
InfoPaletteShowHeight S20.png


Set the Height of a Track Object

In Surveyor 2.0 track objects can be given a height that will place them above (or below) the track. To set the height of a selected track mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  Pos:   z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


[edit]  Placement: Set the Trigger Radius of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Certain track objects have a Trigger Radius that sets how close a consist must approach the object to trigger its action
BlueDot10x10.png The Trigger Radius of an object can be adjusted by the Placement Tool immediately after it has been placed on a track
Track objects that have a Trigger Radius include:-
DotPoint.JPG Track marks such as Track Markers, Priority Markers and Direction Markers
DotPoint.JPG Track Triggers
DotPoint.JPG Whistle Signs
PencilTips.PNG It is a good idea to adjust the trigger radius of these objects so that they do not overlap a track junction


The current Trigger Radius of these objects is shown by the size of the "wings" (Red or Green depending on the type of object) attached to the object and, in some cases, a distance value below the name of the object. Both of these options are shown in the image below.


MarkerTriggerRadius S20.png On one side of the track object is a green Trigger Radius dot that allows the radius value to be adjusted up or down.
NotePad.PNG If no Trigger Radius dot or Red/Green Wings appear on the track object then it does not have an adjustable Trigger Radius


Steps: To adjust the Trigger Radius of a newly placed track object:-
PencilTips.PNG Move your camera POV (Point of View) to directly above the track object before adjusting its Trigger Radius. This will make the adjustment as quick and as smooth as possible.
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click and Drag  forward or back on the Trigger Radius dot. The dot will not move but the "wings" that indicate the radius on the track and the displayed radius value will increase or decrease
DotPoint2.JPG when the radius reaches the required size release the mouse button


PencilTips.PNG This action can also be performed on existing track objects using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool and the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Placement: Track Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
Track Mesh Object Context Menu Options
Once a track mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following Track Object specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the objects Context Menu.
 Rotate Trackside  swaps the position of the object to the other side of the track so that it faces the opposite direction
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch or junction then its switch direction will be reversed
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track. This option will be greyed out if the object is already attached to the track
See PageLink.PNG Free Move: Track Object Context Menu for the full list of Context Menu options for Track Objects.


[edit] Placement: Rolling Stock Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
RollingStockObjectExamples.png

Typical Rolling Stock Objects

Locomotives, wagons, passenger cars


[edit]  Placement: Add a Rolling Stock Object 

    DownSkipMinorUp.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (e.g. locomotives, passenger cars and wagons) can only be attached to track splines.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Steps: To add a Rolling Stock Object the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add.


DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  choose one of the following:-

Options:
 Left Click  on the Trains icon

FilterPaletteTrainsSelected S20.png

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
 Left Click  the Content Drop Down Menu

FilterPaletteNoIconSelected S20.png
Then select Trains
FilterSelectTrains S20.png

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
Steps: If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1RedC.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a  ToolTip  attached to the pointer
DotPoint2RedC.png while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object. This will automatically select it in the  Assets Palette  and it will also select the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below
DotPoint.JPG In the  Filter Palette  the Trains icon will be shown in blue when it is selected and the name Trains will appear in the drop down box below the icons. For more information about the  Filter Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Filter Palette
DotPoint.JPG The  Assets Palette  display is controlled by the selections made in the  Filter Palette . Selecting Scenery Objects in the  Filter Palette  will produce a list of all the installed Rolling Stock Objects in the  Assets Palette . For more information about the  Assets Palette  see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes - Assets Palette


DotPoint2.JPG In the  Assets Palette  you have the option to narrow down the filtered list. Type the assets name or part of the name into the  Search  box. For example if you have selected Trains and want to find rolling stock with "NG42" in their names, then type "NG42" (UPPER/lower case does not matter).

This will list all the Rolling Stock containing the text "NG42" in their names or descriptions.
AssetsPaletteTrainSearchNG42 S20.png
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the required item in the list.

When selected the asset will be highlighted with a light grey background.

NotePad.PNG Notes:

A  Left Click  on an object in the  Assets Palette  filtered list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next  Left Click  in your Trainz World will place that object in the scene.


PencilTips.PNG If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View ( Left Click  the AssetsPaletteListToggleViewIcon S20.png icon). In this view the palette is best used undocked and enlarged - see the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for instructions on undocking and enlarging palettes.


DotPoint4.JPG The final step is to place the selected object into the route.
Steps:
DotPoint1RedC.png In the  Tools Palette  if, for some reason, the Placement Tool is not selected then  Left Click  on its icon S20 PlacementToolIcon.png or press the  E  key
DotPoint2RedC.png  Left Click  on the track at the position where you want to place the object. This will become the Anchor Point where the object will be attached to the track.
PlacementRollingStockObject S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you  Left Click  another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Placement: Move a Rolling Stock Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Once a Rolling Stock Object (e.g. a wagon) has been placed it can be moved using the Placement Tool


NotePad.PNG Rolling Stock Objects are always attached to a track segment. They can be moved along the track or to a different track but they cannot be moved to a position that is to the left, right, above or below the track


Step: To move a Rolling Stock Object using the Placement Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot attached to the object) to any position along the track or to another track. It can also be coupled to a consist and then decoupled by dragging the same Anchor Point.


PencilTips.PNG Moving, coupling and decoupling Rolling Stock Objects can also be performed, with more control, using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool.


[edit]  Placement: Delete a Rolling Stock Object 

    DownUp      
To delete a rolling stock object (or any object) that has just been added by the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool and is still highlighted, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) and select the option  Delete 
NotePad.PNG If the object is not highlighted then you must first switch to either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool, select the object and then choose one of the above options


[edit]  Placement: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
Rolling Stock Object Context Menu Options
Once a rolling stock object has been placed you can open its Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following Rolling Stock Object specific options will appear, along with other more general options, in the objects Context Menu.
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the  Assets Palette 
See PageLink.PNG Rolling Stock Object Context Menu for the full list of Context Menu options for Rolling Stock Objects.


[edit] The Eyedropper Tool

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 DropperToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  R 
The  Eyedropper Tool  identifies and selects objects in your Trainz World


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Tool Options Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Eyedropper Tools
 Tool Targets  The Eyedropper Tool has no Target options so it has no drop down menu list
DotPoint.JPG When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easy to identify that the Eyedropper Tool is active EyedropperToolPointer S20.png
DotPoint.JPG The Eyedropper is also available in the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool, S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool, S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool and the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool by holding down the  Alt  key - see below for more details
 Tool Actions  The Eyedropper Tool has no Action options so it has no drop down menu list


[edit] Quick Steps

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    

[edit] From the Eyedropper Tool

Eyedropper Tools

Asset filter set by the Eyedropper in S20
Steps: To use the Eyedropper Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 DropperToolIcon.png Eyedropper Tool or press the  R  key
DotPoint2.JPG move the pointer, which will look like an Eyedropper, over any object to reveal its name in a  ToolTip  which will appear below the pointer
DotPoint3.JPG Optional: hold the eyedropper over any object for a few seconds to reveal more information such as its <kuid> code
DotPoint4.JPG Optional:  Left Click  on the object to identify it in the  Assets Palette  It will be highlighted in light grey AssetFilterNameHighlighted S20.png
Eyedropper
DotPoint5.JPG Optional:  Left Click  on the asset name in the  Assets Palette  list to switch control to the Placement Tool so the next  Left Click  in your Trainz World will add the selected asset to your layout


NotePad.PNG Notes:

Using the Eyedropper Tool to select an object (Step  5  above) will also copy some of that objects properties into the  Tool Options Palette . These would include:-
DotPoint.JPG  Height  for a scenery (mesh) object
DotPoint.JPG  Scale  and  Rotation  for a ground texture
DotPoint.JPG  Grade  and  Height  for a spline object. If the spline has a slope then the  Height  at the point clicked will be used


[edit] From the Brush, Placement, Free Move, Fine Adjustment, Marquee Tools

BlueDot10x10.png You can access the Eyedropper while using any of the other tools in the  Tools Palette 


Steps: To access the Eyedropper from the other tools:-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key. The S20 DropperToolIcon.png Eyedropper Tool will be temporarily selected in the  Tools Palette 
DotPoint2.JPG move the Eyedropper onto an object to identify it as described above. The name and <kuid> of the object will appear in the pointer tooltip. If you release the  Alt  key without selecting an object then you will be returned to your originally selected tool in the  Tools Palette 
DotPoint3.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the object to select it in the  Assets Palette  and copy some of its properties into the  Tool Options Palette 
PencilTips.PNG If you change your mind you can  Left Click  on another object if you are still holding down the  Alt  key. If you have already released the  Alt  key then hold it down again to select another object
DotPoint4.JPG after a  Left Click  on the selected object release the  Alt  key. The Placement Tool will be selected in the  Tools Palette . This means that the next  Left Click  in your Trainz World will add the selected asset to your layout


[edit] Narrowing the Search

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Sometimes (or often) a scene will be too crowded with different scenery objects to be able to use the Eyedropper Tool to easily select a single object. In these cases additional options are available to help "remove the clutter".


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The  Filter Palette  top Drop Down Menu, its Filter Actions, controls how the filters are applied to your Trainz World. To open the list  Left Click  on the drop down box or on the double arrows on its right.
FilterPaletteOpenActions S20.png The top drop down box will provide four actions:-
BulletTick.png Filter Disabled
BulletTick.png Filter List
BulletTick.png Filter Selection
BulletTick.png Filter Visibility


FilterPaletteActions S20.png


These actions will affect the display and selection of objects in your Trainz World
Filter Actions:
 Filter Disabled  this action disables the Filter Palette so that it has no filtering effect on the Assets Palette which will then display All (Installed) Content including those assets that are Obsolete or Disabled. Its main use is in the Bulk Replace Assets Tool (available in  Trainz Plus only) but it can also be used to temporarily switch off the filters without having to delete them
 Filter List  this action is the default setting for the  Filter Palette  and displays, in both the  Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette , all the installed assets that match any search entered using the Filter Selection Options (the Asset Type icons and the Drop Down List of asset types, search filters and picklists). It has no effect on the operation of the tools in the  Tools Palette or on the objects displayed on the screen in your Trainz World
 Filter Selection  this action will restrict the tools in the  Tools Palette  to those objects that are in the  Assets Palette  filtered list. Objects that are not in the filtered list will still be visible in your Trainz World but cannot be selected
 Filter Visibility  this action will hide all objects in your Trainz World that are not in the  Assets Palette  filtered list which also means that they cannot be selected. The only exceptions are Ground Textures and Effect Layers which will be visible but, unless they are also in the filtered list, cannot selected.


PencilTips.PNG These filter options can be used with the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool, S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool, S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool and the S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Marquee Tool
as well as with the S20 DropperToolIcon.png Eyedropper Tool


As an example the following images show the progressive application of the Filter Actions.

AssetsPaletteFilteredScene2 S20.png AssestFilteredScene1.png Ablue.png In the  Filter Palette  the Filter Action has been set to  Filter Selections  and the Scenery Splines icon has been selected.
DotPointBlueSquare.png All objects are visible on the Surveyor screen
DotPointBlueSquare.png Only Scenery Splines can be selected


NotePad.PNG To reset the filters to allow all objects to be selected set the Filter Action in the  Filter Palette  to  Filter List 
AssetsPaletteFilteredScene3 S20.png AssestFilteredScene2.png Bblue.png In the  Filter Palette  the Filter Action has been set to  Filter Visibilty  and the Scenery Splines icon has been selected.
DotPointBlueSquare.png Only Scenery Splines are visible on the Surveyor screen - Ground Textures and Effect Layers are always visible
DotPointBlueSquare.png Only Scenery Splines can be selected


NotePad.PNG To reset the filters to show and select all objects set the Filter Action in the  Filter Palette  to  Filter List 
AssetsPaletteFilteredScene4 S20.png AssestFilteredScene3.png Cblue.png In the  Filter Palette  the Filter Action has been set to  Filter Visibilty  and the Scenery Splines icon has been selected. In the  Assets Palette  the text "fence" has been added to the  Search  box.
DotPointBlueSquare.png Only Scenery Splines that have the text "fence" in their names or descriptions are visible on the Surveyor screen - Ground Textures and Effect Layers are always visible
DotPointBlueSquare.png Only Scenery Splines that have the text "fence" in their names or descriptions can be selected


NotePad.PNG To reset the filters to show and select all objects set the Filter Action in the  Filter Palette  to  Filter List  and delete the text in the  Search  box


[edit] The Free Move Tool

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  S 
The  Free Move Tool  moves objects around your Trainz World


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Tool Options Palette   Info Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Free Move Tools
 Tool Targets  The Free Move Tool has no Target options so it has no drop down menu list
DotPoint.JPG This tool is ideal for making large horizontal movements of objects
DotPoint.JPG Multiple objects (of different types) can be selected for mass moves and other operations
 Tool Actions  The Free Move Tool has no Action options so it has no drop down menu list


PencilTips.PNGFree Move Alternatives
In addition to the Free Move Tool the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Bblue.png editing its  x:   y:   z:  values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


[edit] Free Move: Selecting an Object

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Free Move Tool can be used to select individual objects and multiple objects. The multiple objects can be of different types (e.g. spline objects and scenery objects) and in different layers


Steps: To select single and multiple objects with the Free Move Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG In the Surveyor screen  Left Click  on the object to be selected, or the first object if multiple objects are to be selected
DotPoint3.JPG To select additional objects, hold down the  Shift  key and  Left Click  on each object to be added to the selection. The additional objects do not have to be the same type or in the same layer
PencilTips.PNG  Double Left Click  on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single selection.
DotPoint.JPG for a spline object all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions) will be selected
DotPoint.JPG for a rolling stock object all the rolling stock objects in that consist will be selected
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG To remove an object from the selection  Left Click  on it again if it is the only selected object or  Shift  +  Left Click  if it is one of several selected objects.
To remove ALL objects from a selection,  Left Click  on a Ground Texture or press the  Ctrl  +  D  keys
DotPoint.JPG When you select an object its Context Icon will appear attached to the object.  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key to open its Context Menu. If more than one object is selected then the Context Icon will be attached to the last object selected


PencilTips.PNG Selecting Objects From a Crowded Scene

Sometimes the object you want to select is part of a crowded scene or is overlapped by other objects, such as splines, and this can make it difficult to select. In these situations the best solution is to use the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to narrow the selection to a single object or to a set of objects.

See PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search for more details


[edit] Free Move: Naming an Object

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Objects can be given names to help identify them with the Finder Tool
BlueDot10x10.png Some objects must be given unique names for display and session operations


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


InfoPaletteObjectName S20.png
Steps: To name (or rename) an object using the Free Move Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the object using the Free Move Tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Info Palette   Left Click  inside the Name text entry box
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a name and press the  Enter  key


NotePad.PNG If more than one object has been selected then only the last selected object, the one with the Context Icon, will be named.


ObjectsUsingSameName.png
There is no ban on two or more objects using the same name


In the image shown on the left there are 4 objects all named Old Orroroo Rd.

This will not cause any problems for scenery objects apart from finding the exact one you want with the Finder Tool ( Ctrl  +  F  keys) as shown in the image on the left - Which of the 4 "Old Orroroo Rd" objects is the one that I need?

Stop.PNG WARNING:
Duplicate names will cause problems for Industries (including passenger enabled stations), Locomotives, Track Marks, Triggers, Switches, Signals, etc that have to be identified to control the operation of a session.
These objects must have unique names


[edit] Free Move: Changing an Objects Layer

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png All objects in the Trainz World are in layers. You can set and change the layers where the objects are placed


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.
An object will be added to a layer when it is placed into the Trainz World by the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool and the Scrapbook. Once it has been placed it can be moved to a different layer.
InfoLayerSetNew.png
Steps: To move a placed object to another layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the object ( Left Click  on the object) or several objects ( Shift  +  Left Click  on each object) to be moved to another layer. If multiple objects are selected then they do not have to be of the same type or in the same starting layer.  Note: The layer(s) containing the object(s) must NOT be locked 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Info Palette   Left Click  on the Layer arrowhead icon (circled in red in the image left). This will open up the layer controls for the last selected object
DotPoint3.JPG the drop down menu box labelled Layer shows the currently assigned layer for that object. If multiple objects from different layers have been selected then no layer name will be shown.  Left Click  on the Up/Down arrows to open the list of all available layers.
DotPoint4.JPG select the destination layer from the list. The object(s) will then be moved to the selected layer - you will be given a warning if the move has failed (usually because an objects layer is locked)
NotePad.PNG Also see:-
PageLink.PNG Assigning Objects to a Different Layer for more details on the Layer Controls in the  Info Palette 
WikiLink.PNG How to Use Layers for detailed information on Layers


[edit] Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Free Move: Move a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
FreeMoveToolCar S20.png  
Steps: To move a Scenery Mesh Object:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object in any horizontal direction


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If multple objects have been selected then all the objects will be moved
DotPoint.JPG When moving a scenery object, its height will be fixed to the terrain height


[edit]  Free Move: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownUp      


Get the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
 
Steps: To copy the height of any selected object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option
 
You can check the height of any selected object or endpoint using the  Info Palette . The height is the last value in the Pos: (Position) data set.
InfoPaletteShowHeight S20.png


Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object

To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  setting from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If multiple objects have been selected then the height of the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the new value.
DotPoint.JPG All other selected objects will have their heights adjusted to maintain their height relative to that object. For example: If another selected object is 2m below the context object then its adjusted height will always remain 2m below the context object


[edit]  Free Move: Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu.  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu
ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If no object has been selected in the  Assets Palette  or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected object to match the set height of the object. The size of the area affected will depend on which has the greater value: the width of the object OR the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the ground height will be set to match, as far as possible, the heights of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected object to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Where multiple objects have been selected the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the  Height  value and the other selected objects will have their heights adjusted up or down by the same amount
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the  Info Palette 


[edit] Free Move: Track Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track

[edit]  Free Move: Move a Track Object 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along the track, beside the track or to a different track


PlacementTrackObject S20.png
Steps: To move a Track Object along the track using the Free Move Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the objects Anchor Point (the small yellow dot in the middle of the track as shown in the image left) to any position along the track or to another track.
NotePad.PNG You can also move the object by dragging the object itself and not its Anchor Point. However, it will lose its fixed distance, both vertical and horizontal, from the centre of the track. You will then have to open its Context Menu and select the  Reattach to Track  option to restore it to the correct height and distance from the track centre


FreeMoveTrackObject S20.png

FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
Step: To move a track object horizontally away from the track with the Free Move Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (but not by using its Anchor Point) to anywhere in the horizontal plane including away from the track. The object will always be linked by a "stretchable" yellow line to its anchor point on the closest track segment.
PencilTips.PNG You can drag the track object to a different track


Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally and can be moved along the track without reversing the change. Their position can be reset to normal by selecting the  Reattach to Track  option from the objects Context Menu

PencilTips.PNG You can select and move multiple track objects at the same time. Use  Shift  +  Left Click  when selecting each object then drag them all to their new positions. The last selected object will have the Context Icon.

However, if you have moved the objects off the track (i.e. to the left or right of the track) then using the  Reattach to Track  option may lead to some objects attaching themselves to a closer track than the one intended.


PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see the next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track


[edit]  Free Move: Set the Height of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  and  Tool Options Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Get the Height of a Track Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
 
Steps: To copy the height of any selected object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the  Tool Options Palette 
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


Set the Height of a Track Object

FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
Throw Lever track object level with the track
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can be moved along the track without reversing the height change. The height can be reset to normal by selecting the  Reattach to Track  option from the objects Context Menu
FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png
After being moved vertically
PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting


[edit]  Free Move: Set the Trigger Radius of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Certain track objects have have a Trigger Radius that sets how close a consist must approach the object to trigger its action
Track objects that have a Trigger Radius include:-
DotPoint.JPG Track marks such as Track Markers, Priority Markers and Direction Markers
DotPoint.JPG Track Triggers
DotPoint.JPG Whistle Signs
PencilTips.PNG It is a good idea to adjust the trigger radius of these objects so that they do not overlap a track junction


The current Trigger Radius of these objects is shown by the size of the "wings" (Red or Green depending on the type of object) attached to the object and, in some cases, a distance value below the name of the object. Both of these options are shown in the image below.


MarkerTriggerRadius S20.png On one side of the track object is a green Trigger Radius dot that allows the radius value to be adjusted up or down.
NotePad.PNG If no Trigger Radius dot or Red/Green Wings appear on the track object then it does not have an adjustable Trigger Radius


Steps: To adjust the Trigger Radius of a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
PencilTips.PNG Move your camera POV (Point of View) to directly above the track object before adjusting its Trigger Radius. This will make the adjustment as quick and as smooth as possible.
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the Track Object to select it.
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click and Drag  forward or back on the Trigger Radius dot. The dot will not move but the "wings" that indicate the radius on the track and the displayed radius value will increase or decrease
DotPoint4.JPG when the radius reaches the required size release the mouse button


PencilTips.PNG This action can also be performed on existing track objects using the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Free Move: Track Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context Menuchoose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


Track Object Context Menu
ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
NotePad.PNG Track objects cannot be copied/moved into a scrapbook by themselves. They will be automatically added to a scrapbook by selecting and copying just the track segment under the objects
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
NotePad.PNG When pasted the track object will include the track and will be surrounded by a wide Marquee Selection Area that, depending on the settings in the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters, may replace all other objects, splines, textures, ground terrain and effect layers in that area
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected object to match the set height of the object. For track objects the size of the area affected will depend on the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected object to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Where multiple objects have been selected the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the  Height  value and the other selected objects will have their heights adjusted up or down by the same amount
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track. This option will be greyed out if the object is already attached to the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track to the other side and facing the opposite direction
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the PageLink.PNG Info Palette


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track to face the opposite direction.
For some track objects this will make no difference but for others it will have an affect on their operation - for example:-
DotPoint.JPG signals and trackside signs (e.g. speed, whistle and stop signs)
DotPoint.JPG track direction markers and directional triggers
  if rotated these track objects will now only affect trains approaching from the opposite direction to the direction that they originally faced.


FreeMoveTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


[edit] Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of segments joined at the endpoints.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Free Move: Spline Troubleshooting Tip 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
PencilTips.PNG Quickly Locate Broken Splines and Tracks
  To quickly check for broken links in a spline or track Double Left Click on a segment. All the correctly joined segments upto the next junction or last endpoint (in both directions) will be highlighted. The highlighting will stop at a broken join (which is technically a "last" endpoint)


[edit]  Free Move: Moving Splines 

    DownUp      
Moving a spline can involve moving one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png moving an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png moving a segment, OR
Cblue.png moving multiple segments including the entire length of the spline (between junctions)


[edit] Free Move: Move a Spline Endpoint

FreeMoveToolSpline S20.png
Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected spline endpoint in any horizontal direction
Active (selected) endpoints are shown as green. Inactive spline endpoints are shown as black


NotePad.PNG The spline endpoint will be fixed at its original height.


[edit] Free Move: Move a Spline Segment or Multiple Segments

Splines are frequently made of multiple segments joined together. You can easily move a spline by moving its segments, individually or as a group.

spline made of 3 joined segments
NotePad.PNG Not all splines have endpoints at each end. As shown in the image on the left, some splines will have an "endcap" that is attached to the start of the first segment and to the end of the last segment, although not all splines with endcaps will have one at each end. The use of an endcap is a purely cosmetic effect - to give the spline a more distinctive appearance.


FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelected S20.png
Steps: To move an individual segment or multiple segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the spline segment to be moved - click anywhere between the two spline endpoints on the segment


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the selected segment will be highlighted in green/yellow.
DotPoint.JPG The segment will have a temporary endpoint inserted at the location you clicked.


PencilTips.PNG A temporary spline endpoint can be made permanent by selecting the  Insert Spline Point Here  option from its Context Menu


FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelected S20.png
IF you are going to select and move more than one spline segment, then:-
DotPoint3.JPG hold the  Shift  key down and individually  Left Click  between the endpoints on each additional segment. The last segment that you  Left Click  on will have a temporary endpoint (placed at the spot you clicked) and the Context Icons added.
PencilTips.PNG To select ALL the segments in a spline, Double Left Click on a segment
DotPoint.JPG This will select all the segments upto the next junction or the final endpoint (in both directions)
DotPoint.JPG The segment that you double-clicked will have the temporary endpoint (placed at the spot you clicked) and Context Icons added
DotPoint.JPG To remove individual spline segments from the selection  Shift  +  Left Click  on each segment to be removed.
DotPoint.JPG To remove ALL the segments from a selection,  Double Left Click  on any highlighted segment OR  Left Click  anywhere outside the selected segments.
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected segment(s) in any horizontal direction.
If you had selected:-
DotPoint.JPG only a single spline segment then only that segment will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will have their shapes (but not their endpoints) adjusted
DotPoint.JPG multiple spline segments then those segments will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will also have their shapes adjusted
DotPoint.JPG the entire spline then ALL the segments and endpoints will be moved
FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelectedMoved S20.png FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelectedMoved S20.png


[edit]  Free Move: Add and Remove Spline Junctions 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A junction is formed when three spline segments are joined at an endpoint. Junctions can be formed using non identical but compatible spline objects, such as different types of track splines.


NotePad.PNG The S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool can be used to form a junction using existing separated splines and endpoints by dragging a terminating endpoint from one spline onto an endpoint between two segments on the other spline. If a new junction is to be formed starting from an existing spline then use the steps below


SplineJunction S20.png
Steps: To add a junction to a spline object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline object to be used for the junction. The easiest method is hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on an existing spline object that you want to use. This will also select the Placement Tool in Step  2  below so you can skip to Step  3 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the spline at the spot where the junction is to be created. This can be on an existing endpoint or between two endpoints where a new endpoint will be inserted
DotPoint4.JPG move the mouse pointer out from the junction to where the next endpoint of the spline branch will be placed and  Left Click 


Steps: To remove a junction but keep all its spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool to select ( Left Click  on) the junction endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG open the endpoint Context Menu by a  Left Click  on its Context Icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png or by pressing the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Separate Splines  menu option (this will separate ALL the spline segments that meet at that endpoint)
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG A junction can be removed by deleting any spline segment that connects to it
DotPoint.JPG A junction endpoint can be moved by using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Free Move: Add a Track Junction 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A track junction is formed using track splines in the same way as described above but track junctions have additional features


PlacementTrackJunction S20.png
When a junction is created using Track Spline Objects, a junction switch will be automatically added.
DotPoint.JPG the switch will be the one specified in the Region listed in the Route Properties. The region and its switch can be changed by opening the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu and selecting  Edit Route... . If no region has been specified then a default switch (as shown left) will be used
DotPoint.JPG use the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to move or delete the switch and to open its Context Menu for editing


LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing a Region can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


NotePad.PNG Using Procedural Tracks
If the track object used is a Procedural Track and the junction is formed with another Procedural Track then the junction endpoint dot will be coloured:-
DotPoint.JPG RED (as shown above) if the junction exceeds the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction. This will not stop the junction from working but it will not display the special features only found in Procedural Tracks, OR
DotPointBlack.JPG BLACK if the junction is within the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction and it will display all the Procedural Track special features
A procedural track junction can be changed from red to black by adjusting the height and/or position (depending on the exact cause of the problem) of the junction endpoint and the endpoints on either side of the junction. See the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Procedural Track for more details
A junction between two non-procedural tracks and between a procedural track and a non-procedural track will always have a red endpoint dot


[edit]  Free Move: Set a Spline Height 

    DownUp      


Get the Height of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a spline segment or endpoint into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper to copy the height of a spline segment
Steps: To copy the Height of a spline segment (but not an endpoint):-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG When the eyedropper is active spline endpoints will not be visible and cannot be selected
DotPoint.JPG If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting
DotPoint.JPG This will also select the clicked object in the  Assets Palette  and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  with the Placement Tool in your Trainz World
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Height  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Height of a spline segment or one of its endpoints:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the spline segment or endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting box
DotPoint3.JPG Select the  Get Height from Selection  option
NotePad.PNG If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


Set the Height of a Spline Object

To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
NotePad.PNG If the selected spline segments have a  Grade  setting then Options Ablue.png Bblue.png and Dblue.png will adjust the height of each segment endpoint so that the heights will change but the grade will remain the same. Option Cblue.png will set all the endpoints to the entered height and the grade will be removed
Ablue.png  Left Click  in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Steps: To set the heights of multiple spline segments to the value stored in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting:-
SelectedSplines S20.png
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline segments using:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png  Shift  +  Left Click  to select individual segments, OR
DotPointBlueSquare.png Double Left Click to select all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions).
DotPoint2.JPG Select one of the options Ablue.png, Bblue.png, Cblue.png or Dblue.png described above
SelectedSplinesHeight S20.png ALL the selected spline segments and their endpoints will be set to the specified height.


[edit]  Free Move: Set a Spline Gradient 

    DownUp      
NotePad.PNG Notes:

  The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


Get the Grade of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the current Grade of any spline segment into the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object that has a Grade setting. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper
Steps: To copy the Grade of a spline segment (but not an endpoint):-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG When the eyedropper is active spline endpoints will not be visible and cannot be selected. This option will also change the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  to the object clicked and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  with the Placement Tool
The height at the point clicked will also be copied into the  Height  setting
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Grade  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Grade of a spline segment or one of its endpoints:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the spline segment or endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Grade  setting box
DotPoint3.JPG Select the  Get Grade from Selection  option


Set the Grade of a Spline Object

To set the gradient of a selected spline segment (including track), choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Grade  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Grade  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png select the  Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  option from the Context Menu for the segment endpoint (not the segment context icon) -  Left Click  on the endpoint Context Icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png to apply the existing grade value. The endpoint that has been selected will be the starting point of the grade.


Steps: To set the gradients of multiple spline segments to the value stored in the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting:-
SelectedSplines S20.png
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline segments using:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png  Shift  +  Left Click  to select individual segments, OR
DotPointBlueSquare.png Double Left Click to select all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions).
NotePad.PNG To apply the same gradient to all the selected segments make sure that the first segment has the context icons
DotPoint2.JPG Open the Context Menu of the first or starting endpoint ( Left Click  on its icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png)
DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint 
SelectedSplinesGradient S20.png The selected spline segments are now set to the specified gradient.
NotePad.PNG If the selected endpoint is NOT at the start of the highlighted segments then the gradient will be applied in both directions from that endpoint as shown below.

SelectedSplinesGradientUShape S20.png

Once the height and/or gradient of the spline segments have been set then other effects can be added.
From the Context Menu of the highlighted segments, select the options:-
 Smooth Ground Under Selected   to smooth the ground surface under a spline object to match its height, and
 Paint Under Selected  to paint the currently selected ground texture under the spline using the settings in the  Tool Options Palette 
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size than this minimum value then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
SelectedSplinesGradientSmoothPaint S20.png


[edit]  Free Move: Set Track Condition and Superelevation 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Condition sets the "smoothness" of the ride over a track segment. The default is 50% which is Average
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Superelevation sets the height difference (as a angle) between the inner and outer rail lines on a curve
BlueDot10x10.png Track Condition and Superelevation are only available for Track Splines


Track Condition

PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.

There are three different methods available for setting the track condition of a track segment.

Ablue.png The  Tool Options Palette  has a Condition setting that only applies to track spline segments.
PlacementSplineTools S20.png
 Condition  The  Tool Options Palette  has a Condition setting that only applies to track spline segments. This can be set for a single selected segment or for multiple selected segments.
Range:  1% (terrible track condition) to

50% (average track condition - the default setting) to
100% (perfect track condition)


Steps: To set Track Condition:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select ( Left Click ) the track segment or ( Shift  +  Left Click  or  Double Left Click ) multiple track segments
DotPoint2.JPG Enter a value from 1 to 100 in the  Tool Options Palette   Condition  setting
DotPoint3.JPG Press the  Enter  key
There will be no visible change to the track appearance, not even for a 1% setting, as this change would have to be built into the track mesh. Instead when a consist moves over the track there will be a visible change in its rocking or swaying motion.


Bblue.png A second method of setting the Track Condition of a selected track segment is to use its Track Segment Context Menu.
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png
Steps: To set the Track Condition of a single selected track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Segment Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a track condition as a % value where it shows Default. The description on the right will change to show the effect of the new value
TrackConditionSetting S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new value and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new value and exit


Cblue.png A third method of setting the Track Condition is to use the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool to place an invisible track "bump" object on a track segment.

See PageLink.PNG Placement: Set Track Condition and Superelevation for the details


Track Superelevation

The Track Superelevation can only be set through the Track Endpoint Context Menu. You can have a different value set for each endpoint that will reflect the changes that can take place around a curve. For more information on how to calculate and use Superelevation see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation
ContextMenuSplineEndPoint S20.png
Steps: To set the Superelevation for an endpoint of a newly placed track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Spline Endpoint Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a Superelevation Degree as an angle (in degrees) - this is the superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint) per degree of curvature where 0 = none
TrackSuperElevationSetting S20.png The Superelevation Angle is calculated using the radius of the curve, the maximum track speed and the track gauge.
See the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation for the formula
DotPoint4.JPG Enter a Superelevation Limit as an angle (in degrees) - this is the maximum allowed superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new values and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new values and exit
Repeat the above steps for each endpoint


[edit]  Free Move: Spline Object Context Menus 

    DownUp      
A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have Context Icons. The icon design will vary between object types and their position on the spline object. Each icon will open its own Context Menu.


ContextIconsSpline S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


To open a selected objects Context Menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
NotePad.PNG Notes: Using the  T  key with splines

SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png
TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png
If a spline segment has been selected then pressing the  T  key will open the Segment Context Menu and the Menu options you select or edit will apply to the whole segment or all selected segments
 
SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png If a spline end point has been selected then pressing the  T  key will open the End Point Context Menu and the Menu options you select or edit will only apply to that particular endpoint


Spline Object Context Menus
SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineEndPoint S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The  Edit Details  option is only available for Track splines. The properties that can be edited will depend on whether you have selected a Track Segment or a Track Endpoint.

DotPoint.JPG Endpoint Details - the track Superelevation properties for that endpoint. Superelevation is a feature used on curves to raise the height of the outside track of the curve slightly above the height of the inside track. This allows higher speeds around curves.
For more information on Superelevation see the Trainz Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation
DotPoint.JPG Segment Details - the track Condition property for that segment.
Track Condition is the "smoothness" of the ride over a track segment
100% = perfect 50% = average 1% = extremely poor
You can also select multiple track segments and set their track Condition by editing their combined  Condition  value in the  Tool Options Palette .


NotePad.PNG When copying/moving track segments into a scrapbook any track objects on the segments will be included in the scrapbook
 Cut  remove the selected segment or segments from the route and move them into the Scrapbook (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Copy  copy the selected segment or segments and place them into the Scrapbook (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
NotePad.PNG When pasted from a scrapbook splines will be surrounded by a wide Marquee Selection Area that, depending on the settings in the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters, may replace all other objects, splines, textures, ground terrain and effect layers in that area
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected spline to match its set height. If multiple spline segments have been selected then the ground under all the segments will be smoothed to their height. The size of the area affected will depend on which has the greater value: the width of the spline OR the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting. Does not work for endpoints SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint or segments to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png only)
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Height from an existing spline endpoint into the  Height  setting of the  Tool Options Palette . Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on the spline endpoint to copy its Height value. That value can then be used to set the Height of other spline endpoints
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  you must first select a segment then click on one of its endpoint icons SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png. This sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the  Tool Options Palette . Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
NotePad.PNG If multiple segments have been selected then this option will break ALL the selected segments into separate (independent) splines
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png only). Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  splits the selected segment into two segments by adding a new endpoint at the point where the segment was clicked (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected spline object. This option is only available for Track splines. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the  Info Palette 


[edit] Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.
PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Free Move: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      

Use the Free Move tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

NotePad.PNG Rolling Stock Objects are always attached to a track segment. They can be moved along the track or to a different track but they cannot be moved to a position that is to the left, right, above or below the track


PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FreeMoveRollingStock S20.png


Steps: To move a Rolling Stock Object or objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click and Drag  the object or objects
DotPoint2.JPG release the objects on or close to their new track position
NotePad.PNG Notes: Rolling Stock Conflicts


You can accidently place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".
This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.
PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png
The simple solution is to use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.


[edit]  Free Move: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a rake of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  +  Left Click  on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one ( Left Click ) or more ( Shift  +  Left Click ) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


[edit]  Free Move: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select ( Left Click ) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  +  Left Click  to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


NotePad.PNG If the two objects do not couple check that both are on the same track


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  +  Left Click , on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu and  Left Click  on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR] press the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1RedC.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the  Merge into Single Train  option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2RedC.png Context Icon on the Guard Van

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png
Using the  Merge into Single Train  option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


[edit]  Free Move: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.
To open a selected rolling stock object's Context Menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
PencilTips.PNG You cannot add rolling stock assets to a Scrapbook but you can create and save Consist Assets that have multiple rolling stock objects
Steps: To create a Consist Asset:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the consist -  Double Left Click  on the consist or  Shift  +  Left Click  on individual items
DotPoint2.JPG open the consist Context Menu -  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG select the option  Save to Consist Asset... 
DotPoint4.JPG enter a name and an optional description for your new Consist Asset and click the Tick.PNG icon
The consist will appear as a Train Asset in the  Assets Palette 


Rolling Stock Object Context Menu
ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png


NotePad.PNG You cannot set a Height value for a rolling stock object. It will always take the same height as the track on which it is placed
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock (see Tips above).
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the rolling stock object to match its height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new Train ssset in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the PageLink.PNG Info Palette


[edit] The Fine Adjustment Tool

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  D 
The  Fine Adjustment Tool  makes 3D adjustments (XYZ position and rotations) to objects in your Trainz World


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Tool Options Palette   Info Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Fine Adjustment Tools
 Tool Targets  The Fine Adjustment Tool has no Target options so it has no drop down menu list
DotPoint.JPG This tool is ideal for making small adjustments to objects - horizontally, vertically and rotations in 3D space
DotPoint.JPG Multiple objects (of different types) can be selected for mass adjustments and other operations
 Tool Actions  The Fine Adjustment Tool has no Action options so it has no drop down menu list


PencilTips.PNGFine Adjustment Alternatives
In addition to the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool the position, orientation and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png editing its  x:   y:   z:  position values and  r:   p:   y:  rotation values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


BlueDot10x10.png The most obvious feature of the Fine Adjustment Tool is the 3D Anchor Frame it adds to a selected object. The frame is made of 3 straight and 3 curved coloured lines plus a central dot, called Anchors
BlueDot10x10.png The Anchors in the Fine Adjustment Tool are used to move and rotate a selected object, or a group of selected objects, through 3D space.
FineAdjust3DFrame S20.png The Anchor controls are:-
 The Horizontal and Vertical Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  move the object (forward/back or up/down) in the direction of the Anchor line
 The Rotational Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  rotate the object (clockwise and anti-clockwise) along the Anchor Arc Line centred around the Anchor Straight Line of the same colour
NotePad.PNG Not all objects will have  Red  and/or  Green  rotational Anchors. Some objects will have no rotational anchors at all.
 The Object Anchor 
     (black central dot) moves the object in any horizontal direction
NotePad.PNG The orientation of the  Red  and  Green  horizontal anchor lines is based on the orientation of the object when it is placed in the scene, not on the compass directions
Steps: To use the Fine Adjustment Tool controls:-
DotPoint1.JPG move the tool pointer onto an Anchor - its colour will change to yellow for Anchor lines or green for the Object Anchor
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the Object Anchor in any direction or move the pointer along the chosen Anchor Line in the required direction (e.g. up on the blue vertical Anchor or clockwise around the arc of the red rotational Anchor)


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving anchors, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  x:   y:   z:  fine adjustment arrows in the  Info Palette  object  Pos:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below), OR
Cblue.png use the  r:   p:   y:  fine adjustment arrows in the  Info Palette  object  Rot:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the rotation to accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Selecting an Object

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Fine Adjustment Tool can be used to select individual objects and multiple objects. The multiple objects can be of different types (e.g. spline objects and scenery objects) and in different layers


Steps: To select single and multiple objects with the Fine Adjustment Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the [[image:S20_FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png|link=|20px] Fine Adjustment Tool] or press the  D  key
DotPoint2.JPG In the Surveyor screen  Left Click  on the object to be selected, or the first object if multiple objects are to be selected
DotPoint3.JPG To select additional objects, hold down the  Shift  key and  Left Click  on each object to be added to the selection. The additional objects do not have to be the same type or in the same layer
PencilTips.PNG  Double Left Click  on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single selection.
DotPoint.JPG for a spline object all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions) will be selected
DotPoint.JPG for a rolling stock object all the rolling stock objects in that consist will be selected
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG To remove an object from the selection  Left Click  on it again if it is the only selected object or  Shift  +  Left Click  if it is one of several selected objects.
To remove ALL objects from a selection,  Left Click  on a Ground Texture or press the  Ctrl  +  D  keys
DotPoint.JPG When you select an object its Context Icon will appear attached to the object.  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key to open its Context Menu. If more than one object is selected then the Context Icon will be attached to the last object selected


PencilTips.PNG Selecting Objects From a Crowded Scene

Sometimes the object you want to select is part of a crowded scene or is overlapped by other objects, such as splines, and this can make it difficult to select. In these situations the best solution is to use the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to narrow the selection to a single object or to a set of objects.

See PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search for more details


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Naming an Object

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Objects can be given names to help identify them with the Finder Tool
BlueDot10x10.png Some objects must be given unique names for display and session operations


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


InfoPaletteObjectName S20.png
Steps: To name (or rename) an object using the Fine Adjustment Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the object using the Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Info Palette   Left Click  inside the Name text entry box
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a name and press the  Enter  key


NotePad.PNG If more than one object has been selected then only the last selected object, the one with the Context Icon, will be named.


ObjectsUsingSameName.png
There is no ban on two or more objects using the same name


In the image shown on the left there are 4 objects all named Old Orroroo Rd.

This will not cause any problems for scenery objects apart from finding the exact one you want with the Finder Tool ( Ctrl  +  F  keys) as shown in the image on the left - Which of the 4 "Old Orroroo Rd" objects is the one that I need?

Stop.PNG WARNING:
Duplicate names will cause problems for Industries (including passenger enabled stations), Locomotives, Track Marks, Triggers, Switches, Signals, etc that have to be identified to control the operation of a session.
These objects must have unique names


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Changing an Objects Layer

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png All objects in the Trainz World are in layers. You can set and change the layers where the objects are placed


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document
An object will be added to a layer when it is placed into the Trainz World by the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool and the Scrapbook. Once it has been placed it can be moved to a different layer.
InfoLayerSetNew.png
Steps: To move a placed object to another layer:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the object ( Left Click  on the object) or several objects ( Shift  +  Left Click  on each object) to be moved to another layer. If multiple objects are selected then they do not have to be of the same type or in the same starting layer.  Note: The layer(s) containing the object(s) must NOT be locked 
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Info Palette   Left Click  on the Layer arrowhead icon (circled in red in the image left). This will open up the layer controls for the last selected object
DotPoint3.JPG the drop down menu box labelled Layer shows the currently assigned layer for that object. If multiple objects from different layers have been selected then no layer name will be shown.  Left Click  on the Up/Down arrows to open the list of all available layers.
DotPoint4.JPG select the destination layer from the list. The object(s) will then be moved to the selected layer - you will be given a warning if the move has failed (usually because an objects layer is locked)
NotePad.PNG Also see:-
PageLink.PNG Assigning Objects to a Different Layer for more details on the Layer Controls in the  Info Palette 
WikiLink.PNG How to Use Layers for detailed information on Layers


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Move a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
To move an object with the Fine Adjustment Tool choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag anywhere on the selected object (except on an Anchor line) to move it freely in any horizontal direction
OR
Bblue.png Left Click and Drag on an Anchor line to move or rotate it in the direction of the line or arc
These operations can also be performed on a group of selected objects. The 3D Anchor Frame will be on the last object added to the group.


Using the Anchors

 Red   Green  and  Black  horizontal Anchor movements
FineAdjustXYMove S20.png


Steps: To move a mesh object in a straight horizontal direction:-
DotPoint1.JPG place the pointer anywhere on the  Red  or  Green  horizontal Anchor line
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click and Drag  in either direction along the colored Anchor line


The black dot      at the centre of the Anchor Frame is the Object Anchor.

Steps: To move a mesh object using the Object Anchor:-
DotPoint1.JPG place the pointer on the black Object Anchor
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click and Drag  in any direction


The same steps apply to the other Anchor Lines, straight and curved, as shown below.

 Blue  vertical Anchor movement
FineAdjustZMove S20.png
   Green  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustYawMove S20.png
   Red  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustPitchMove S20.png
   Blue  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustRotateXYMove S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will have  Red  or  Green  Rotational Anchors. Some objects will have no rotational anchors at all.
DotPoint.JPG Objects can be restored to their original height and rotation settings by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reset Object Rotation  to cancel the rotation changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change
DotPoint.JPG The  Randomise Object Rotation  option in the Context Menu only affects rotations around the vertical axis - the  Blue  Rotational Anchor.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery Mesh objects can be raised above and lowered below the ground level.


Get the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
 
Steps: To copy the height of any selected object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option
 
You can check the height of any selected object or endpoint using the  Info Palette . The height is the last value in the Pos: (Position) data set.
InfoPaletteShowHeight S20.png


Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object

To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line.  Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only , OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Cblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Eblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If multiple objects have been selected then the height of the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the new value.
DotPoint.JPG All other selected objects will have their heights adjusted to maintain their height relative to that object. For example: If another selected object is 2m below the context object then its adjusted height will always remain 2m below the context object


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu.  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu
ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If no object has been selected in the  Assets Palette  or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected object to match the set height of the object. The size of the area affected will depend on which has the greater value: the width of the object OR the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the ground height will be set to match, as far as possible, the heights of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected object to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Where multiple objects have been selected the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the  Height  value and the other selected objects will have their heights adjusted up or down by the same amount
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random  Blue  Rotation Anchor angle to each object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the  Info Palette 


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Track Objects

Skip Down) Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Move a Track Object 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track or to a different track
FineAdjustTrackObject S20.png
To move a selected track object horizontally, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png For movements along the track only - Left Click and Drag:-
DotPoint.JPG the objects Anchor Point (the yellow dot in the centre of the track), OR
DotPoint.JPG on its  Green  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line)
Bblue.png For movements left or right of the track - Left Click and Drag
DotPoint.JPG on the  Red  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line), OR
DotPoint.JPG on the Object Anchor (the black dot) to get unrestricted horizontal movement including to a different track
NotePad.PNG For most track objects the Rotational Anchors, if they are present, will have no effect
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png

Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally and can be moved along the track without reversing the change. Their position can be reset to normal by selecting the  Reattach to Track  option from the objects Context Menu

PencilTips.PNG You can select and move multiple track objects at the same time. Use  Shift  +  Left Click  when selecting each object then drag them all to their new positions. The last selected object will have the Context Icon.

However, if you have moved the objects off the track (i.e. to the left or right of the track) then using the  Reattach to Track  option may lead to some objects attaching themselves to a closer track than the one intended.


PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see the next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.


Get the Height of a Track Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
 
Steps: To copy the height of any selected object into the  Height  setting:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


Set the Height of a Track Object

FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png

Throw Lever track object level with track
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png

After being moved vertically
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line.  Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only , OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Cblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Dblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Eblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting


Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can be moved along the track without reversing the height change. The height can be reset to normal by selecting the  Reattach to Track  option from the objects Context Menu


NotePad.PNG For most track objects the Rotational Anchors, if they are present, will have no effect


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set the Trigger Radius of a Track Object 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png Certain track objects have a Trigger Radius that sets how close a consist must approach the object to trigger its action
Track objects that have a Trigger Radius include:-
DotPoint.JPG Track marks such as Track Markers, Priority Markers and Direction Markers
DotPoint.JPG Track Triggers
DotPoint.JPG Whistle Signs
PencilTips.PNG It is a good idea to adjust the trigger radius of these objects so that they do not overlap a track junction


The current Trigger Radius of these objects is shown by the size of the "wings" (Red or Green depending on the type of object) attached to the object and, in some cases, a distance value below the name of the object. Both of these options are shown in the image below.


MarkerTriggerRadius S20.png On one side of the track object is a green Trigger Radius dot that allows the radius value to be adjusted up or down.
NotePad.PNG If no Trigger Radius dot or Red/Green Wings appear on the track object then it does not have an adjustable Trigger Radius


Steps: To adjust the Trigger Radius of a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG use the Fine Adjustment Tool to select the track object
PencilTips.PNG Move your camera POV (Point of View) to directly above the track object before adjusting its Trigger Radius. This will make the adjustment as quick and as smooth as possible.
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click and Drag  forward or back on the Trigger Radius dot. The dot will not move but the "wings" that indicate the radius on the track and the displayed radius value will increase or decrease
DotPoint3.JPG when the radius reaches the required size release the mouse button


PencilTips.PNG This action can also be performed on existing track objects using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Track Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context Menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


Track Object Context Menu
ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
NotePad.PNG Track objects cannot be copied/moved into a scrapbook by themselves. They will be automatically added to a scrapbook by selecting and copying just the track segment under the objects
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
NotePad.PNG When pasted the track object will include the track and will be surrounded by a wide Marquee Selection Area that, depending on the settings in the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters, may replace all other objects, splines, textures, ground terrain and effect layers in that area
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected object to match the set height of the object. For track objects the size of the area affected will depend on the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected object to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Where multiple objects have been selected the context object, the one with the Context Icon, will have its height set to the  Height  value and the other selected objects will have their heights adjusted up or down by the same amount
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track. This option will be greyed out if the object is already attached to the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track to the other side and facing the opposite direction
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the PageLink.PNG Info Palette


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track to face the opposite direction.
For some track objects this will make no difference but for others it will have an affect on their operation - for example:-
DotPoint.JPG signals and trackside signs (e.g. speed, whistle and stop signs)
DotPoint.JPG track direction markers and directional triggers
  if rotated these track objects will now only affect trains approaching from the opposite direction to the direction that they originally faced.


FineAdjustTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of segments joined at the endpoints.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Spline Troubleshooting Tip 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      
PencilTips.PNG Quickly Locate Broken Splines and Tracks
  To quickly check for broken links in a spline or track Double Left Click on a segment. All the correctly joined segments upto the next junction or last endpoint (in both directions) will be highlighted. The highlighting will stop at a broken join (which is technically a "last" endpoint)


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Moving Splines 

    DownUp      
Moving a spline can involve moving one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png moving an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png moving a segment, OR
Cblue.png moving multiple segments including the entire length of the spline (between junctions)


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Move a Spline Endpoint

FineAdjustSplineEndPoint S20.png

The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline endpoint.

Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG Select,  Left Click  on, the spline endpoint to be moved.
Note: only the horizontal  Red  and  Green  and the vertical  Blue  lines can be selected.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor to move the endpoint in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png the endpoint itself to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Move a Spline Segment or Multiple Segments

FineAdjustSplineSegment S20.png The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline segment.
Steps: To move spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG Select,  Left Click  on, the spline segment to be moved.
PencilTips.PNG To select:-
DotPoint.JPG more than one segment -  Shift  +  Left Click  on each segment
DotPoint.JPG ALL the segments - Double Left Click on a segment. This will the select segments in both directions from the segment clicked upto the next junction or the final endpoint
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
 
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor Line to move the segment or segments in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png anywhere in a segment to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


DotPoint.JPG To remove individual spline segments from the selection simply  Shift  +  Left Click  on each segment to be removed.
DotPoint.JPG To remove ALL the segments from a selection,  Double Left Click  on any highlighted segment OR  Left Click  anywhere outside the selected segments.


FineAdjustSplineSegmentStraight S20.png Selecting a spline segment with the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool will add a Temporary Endpoint at the point where the segment was clicked.


This will produce 3 Fine Adjustment Tool control frames, one at each end of the segment and one at the click point, as shown in the image on the left. The whole segment can be moved, as shown in the following images, by a Left Click and Drag anywhere within the segment.

PencilTips.PNG A temporary spline endpoint can be made permanent by selecting the  Insert Spline Point Here  option from its Context Menu
FineAdjustSplineSegmentXYMove S20.png
Segment moved to the right along the  Red  horizontal Anchor line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentZMove S20.png
Segment moved up along the  Blue  vertical Anchor line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Green   Blue  straight anchor lines will move the whole segment along the direction of the line

FineAdjustSplineSegmentRotate S20.png
Segment rotated anti-clockwise around the  Blue  rotational Anchor arc line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentPitch S20.png
Segment rotated clockwise around the  Red  rotational Anchor arc line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Blue  curved anchor lines will rotate the whole segment around the axis of the same colour

 Green  curved anchor line has no effect


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  line height change and a  Red  Anchor rotation can be cancelled at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Settle on Ground  option from the segments Context Menu
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  Anchor rotation can be straightened at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Straighten Spline  option from the segments Context Menu but this will not return the endpoints to their original positions


NotePad.PNG Notes: Superelevation for Trainz Geekz

In the real world rail tracks have a property called Superelevation which is used on curves. The track is tilted so that the outside track is raised slightly above the level of the inside track. This allows higher train speeds around the curve. The degree of tilting or superelevation that has to be applied depends on the curve radius, the track gauge and the maximum allowed train speed for that curve.

In the Trainz World track splines can also have superelevation. This feature is found in the  Edit Details  option in the Context Menu of track spline endpoints.
See PageLink.PNG Spline Object Context Menus

Adding superelevation would have been the function of the  Green  curved anchor line but its correct application is more complex than a simple rotation around the track spline axis. For more information see the Trainz Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Add and Remove Spline Junctions 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A junction is formed when three spline segments are joined at an endpoint. Junctions can be formed using non identical but compatible spline objects, such as different types of track splines.


NotePad.PNG The S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool can be used to form a junction using existing separated splines and endpoints by dragging a terminating endpoint from one spline onto an endpoint between two segments on the other spline. If a new junction is to be formed starting from an existing spline then use the steps below


SplineJunction S20.png
Steps: To add a junction to a spline object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline object to be used for the junction. The easiest method is hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on an existing spline object that you want to use. This will also select the Placement Tool in Step  2  below so you can skip to Step  3 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the spline at the spot where the junction is to be created. This can be on an existing endpoint or between two endpoints where a new endpoint will be inserted
DotPoint4.JPG move the mouse pointer out from the junction to where the next endpoint of the spline branch will be placed and  Left Click 


Steps: To remove a junction but keep all its spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG use the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to select ( Left Click  on) the junction endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG open the endpoint Context Menu by a  Left Click  on its Context Icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png or by pressing the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Separate Splines  menu option (this will separate ALL the spline segments that meet at that endpoint)
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG A junction can be removed by deleting any spline segment that connects to it
DotPoint.JPG A junction endpoint can also be moved by using the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Add a Track Junction 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png A track junction is formed using track splines in the same way as described above but track junctions have additional features


PlacementTrackJunction S20.png
When a junction is created using Track Spline Objects, a junction switch will be automatically added.
DotPoint.JPG the switch will be the one specified in the Region listed in the Route Properties. The region and its switch can be changed by opening the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu and selecting  Edit Route... . If no region has been specified then a default switch (as shown left) will be used
DotPoint.JPG use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool to move or delete the switch and to open its Context Menu for editing


LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing a Region can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


NotePad.PNG Using Procedural Tracks
If the track object used is a Procedural Track and the junction is formed with another Procedural Track then the junction endpoint dot will be coloured:-
DotPoint.JPG RED (as shown above) if the junction exceeds the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction. This will not stop the junction from working but it will not display the special features only found in Procedural Tracks, OR
DotPointBlack.JPG BLACK if the junction is within the maximum allowed values for a procedural junction and it will display all the Procedural Track special features
A procedural track junction can be changed from red to black by adjusting the height and/or position (depending on the exact cause of the problem) of the junction endpoint and the endpoints on either side of the junction. See the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Procedural Track for more details
A junction between two non-procedural tracks and between a procedural track and a non-procedural track will always have a red endpoint dot


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set a Spline Height 

    DownUp      

Get the Height of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a spline segment or endpoint into the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper to copy the height of a spline segment
Steps: To copy the Height of a spline segment (but not an endpoint):-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG When the eyedropper is active spline endpoints will not be visible and cannot be selected
DotPoint.JPG If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting
DotPoint.JPG This will also select the clicked object in the  Assets Palette  and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  with the Placement Tool in your Trainz World
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Height  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Height of a spline segment or one of its endpoints:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the spline segment or endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Height  setting box
DotPoint3.JPG Select the  Get Height from Selection  option
NotePad.PNG If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


Set the Height of a Spline Object

To set the height of a selected spline segment (including track) or endpoint using the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool choose one of the following:-
Options:
NotePad.PNG If the selected spline segments have a  Grade  setting then Options Ablue.png Bblue.png and Dblue.png will adjust the height of each segment endpoint so that the heights will change but the grade will remain the same. Option Cblue.png will set all the endpoints to the entered height and the grade will be removed
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the vertical  Blue  anchor line in the 3D Anchor Frame. OR
Bblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Cblue.png in the  Tool Options Palette   Left Click  inside the  Height  setting and enter a new value (or keep the existing value) then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu ( Left Click  on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Eblue.png in the  Info Palette  enter a value in the objects Pos:  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Steps: To set the heights of multiple spline segments to the value stored in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting:-
SelectedSplines S20.png
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline segments using:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png  Shift  +  Left Click  to select individual segments, OR
DotPointBlueSquare.png Double Left Click to select all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions).
DotPoint2.JPG Select one of the options Ablue.png, Bblue.png, Cblue.png, Dblue.png or Eblue.png described above
SelectedSplinesHeight S20.png ALL the selected spline segments and their endpoints will be set to the specified height.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set a Spline Gradient 

    DownUp      
NotePad.PNG Notes:

  The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade (cliff height divided by 0) which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


Get the Grade of a Spline Object

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the current Grade of any spline segment into the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting. Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object that has a Grade setting. Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Use the Eyedropper
Steps: To copy the Grade of a spline segment (but not an endpoint):-
DotPoint1.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the mouse tool pointer onto the spline segment
DotPoint2.JPG while holding down the  Alt  key  Left Click  on the spline segment
NotePad.PNG When the eyedropper is active spline endpoints will not be visible and cannot be selected. This option will also change the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  to the object clicked and it will become the next object added by a  Left Click  with the Placement Tool
The height at the point clicked will also be copied into the  Height  setting
  OR
Bblue.png Use the  Grade  setting drop down menu
Steps: To copy the Grade of a spline segment or one of its endpoints:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the spline segment or endpoint
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  Right Click inside the  Grade  setting box
DotPoint3.JPG Select the  Get Grade from Selection  option


Set the Grade of a Spline Object

Steps: To set the gradients of multiple spline segments to the value stored in the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting:-
SelectedSplines S20.png
DotPoint1.JPG Select the spline segments using:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png  Shift  +  Left Click  to select individual segments, OR
DotPointBlueSquare.png Double Left Click to select all the segments up to the next junction (in both directions).
NotePad.PNG To apply the same gradient to all the selected segments make sure that the first segment has the context icons
DotPoint2.JPG Open the Context Menu of the first or starting endpoint ( Left Click  on its icon SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png)
DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint 
SelectedSplinesGradient S20.png The selected spline segments are now set to the specified gradient.
NotePad.PNG If the selected endpoint is NOT at the start of the highlighted segments then the gradient will be applied in both directions from that endpoint as shown below.

SelectedSplinesGradientUShape S20.png

Once the height and/or gradient of the spline segments have been set then other effects can be added.
From the Context Menu of the highlighted segments, select the options:-
 Smooth Ground Under Selected   to smooth the ground surface under a spline object to match its height, and
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
SelectedSplinesGradientSmoothPaint S20.png


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Set Track Condition and Superelevation 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Condition sets the "smoothness" of the ride over a track segment. The default is 50% which is Average
BlueDot10x10.png The Track Superelevation sets the height difference (as a angle) between the inner and outer rail lines on a curve
BlueDot10x10.png Track Condition and Superelevation are only available for Track Splines


Track Condition

PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


There are three different methods available for setting the track condition of a track segment.

Ablue.png The  Tool Options Palette  has a Condition setting that only applies to track spline segments.
PlacementSplineTools S20.png
 Condition  The  Tool Options Palette  has a Condition setting that only applies to track spline segments. This can be set for a single selected segment or for multiple selected segments.
Range:  1% (terrible track condition) to

50% (average track condition - the default setting) to
100% (perfect track condition)


Steps: To set Track Condition:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select ( Left Click ) the track segment or ( Shift  +  Left Click  or  Double Left Click ) multiple track segments
DotPoint2.JPG Enter a value from 1 to 100 in the  Tool Options Palette   Condition  setting
DotPoint3.JPG Press the  Enter  key
There will be no visible change to the track appearance, not even for a 1% setting, as this change would have to be built into the track mesh. Instead when a consist moves over the track there will be a visible change in its rocking or swaying motion.


Bblue.png A second method of setting the Track Condition of a selected track segment is to use its Track Segment Context Menu.
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png
Steps: To set the Track Condition of a single selected track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Segment Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a track condition as a % value where it shows Default. The description on the right will change to show the effect of the new value
TrackConditionSetting S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new value and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new value and exit


Cblue.png A third method of setting the Track Condition is to use the S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Placement Tool to place an invisible track "bump" object on a track segment.

See PageLink.PNG Placement: Set Track Condition and Superelevation for the details


Track Superelevation

The Track Superelevation can only be set through the Track Endpoint Context Menu. You can have a different value set for each endpoint that will reflect the changes that can take place around a curve. For more information on how to calculate and use Superelevation see the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation
ContextMenuSplineEndPoint S20.png
Steps: To set the Superelevation for an endpoint of a newly placed track segment:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png Track Spline Endpoint Context Icon to open its menu
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the  Edit Details  option at the bottom of the list
DotPoint3.JPG Enter a Superelevation Degree as an angle (in degrees) - this is the superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint) per degree of curvature where 0 = none
TrackSuperElevationSetting S20.png The Superelevation Angle is calculated using the radius of the curve, the maximum track speed and the track gauge.
See the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation for the formula
DotPoint4.JPG Enter a Superelevation Limit as an angle (in degrees) - this is the maximum allowed superelevation angle at this vertex (endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Click  Save Changes  to set the new values and exit or  Cancel  to cancel the new values and exit
Repeat the above steps for each endpoint


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Spline Object Context Menus 

    DownUp      
A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have Context Icons. The icon design will vary between object types and their position on the spline object. Each icon will open its own Context Menu.


ContextIconsSpline S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


To open a selected objects Context Menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
NotePad.PNG Notes: Using the  T  key with splines

SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.png
TrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png
If a spline segment has been selected then pressing the  T  key will open the Segment Context Menu and the Menu options you select or edit will apply to the whole segment or all selected segments
 
SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png If a spline end point has been selected then pressing the  T  key will open the End Point Context Menu and the Menu options you select or edit will only apply to that particular endpoint


Spline Object Context Menus
SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineEndPoint S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The  Edit Details  option is only available for Track splines. The properties that can be edited will depend on whether you have selected a Track Segment or a Track Endpoint.

DotPoint.JPG Endpoint Details - the track Superelevation properties for that endpoint. Superelevation is a feature used on curves to raise the height of the outside track of the curve slightly above the height of the inside track. This allows higher speeds around curves.
For more information on Superelevation see the Trainz Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use Superelevation
DotPoint.JPG Segment Details - the track Condition property for that segment.
Track Condition is the "smoothness" of the ride over a track segment
100% = perfect 50% = average 1% = extremely poor
You can also select multiple track segments and set their track Condition by editing their combined  Condition  value in the  Tool Options Palette .


NotePad.PNG When copying/moving track segments into a scrapbook any track objects on the segments will be included in the scrapbook
 Cut  remove the selected segment or segments from the route and move them into the Scrapbook (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Copy  copy the selected segment or segments and place them into the Scrapbook (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
NotePad.PNG When pasted from a scrapbook splines will be surrounded by a wide Marquee Selection Area that, depending on the settings in the PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Filters, may replace all other objects, splines, textures, ground terrain and effect layers in that area
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the  Assets Palette . If the asset selected in the  Assets Palette  is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the selected spline to match its set height. If multiple spline segments have been selected then the ground under all the segments will be smoothed to their height. The size of the area affected will depend on which has the greater value: the width of the spline OR the  Tool Options Palette   Radius  setting. Does not work for endpoints SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint or segments to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png only)
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Height from an existing spline endpoint into the  Height  setting of the  Tool Options Palette . Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on the spline endpoint to copy its Height value. That value can then be used to set the Height of other spline endpoints
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  you must first select a segment then click on one of its endpoint icons SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png. This sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the  Tool Options Palette   Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the  Tool Options Palette . Once it has been copied it can be applied to any other object.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and  Left Click  on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png only)
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one (SplineEndpointContextIcon S20.png only). Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  splits the selected segment into two segments by adding a new endpoint at the point where the segment was clicked (SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png only)
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected spline object. This option is only available for Track splines. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the  Info Palette 


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects

Skip Down Skip Up DownUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownSkipMinorBlank.png      

Use the Fine Adjustment tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

NotePad.PNG Rolling Stock Objects are always attached to a track segment. They can be moved along the track or to a different track but they cannot be moved to a position that is to the left, right, above or below the track


PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FineAdjustRollingStock S20.png
;- Despite their presence in the Fine Adjustment Tool 3D Anchor Frame the  Red   Green   Blue  Rotational Anchor lines and the  Blue  Vertical Anchor Line will NOT work on Rolling Stock Objects
;- The Object Anchor (the central black dot) will move the selected rolling stock object or objects in any horizontal direction but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline
;- The  Green  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects along the track
;- The  Red  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects horizontally off the track but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline
Steps: To move a Rolling Stock Object or objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click and Drag  the object or objects
DotPoint2.JPG release the objects on or close to their new track position


NotePad.PNG Notes: Rolling Stock Conflicts

You can accidently place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".

This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.

The simple solution is to use the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.
PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a rake of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  +  Left Click  on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one ( Left Click ) or more ( Shift  +  Left Click ) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select ( Left Click ) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  +  Left Click  to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


NotePad.PNG If the two objects do not couple check that both are on the same track


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  +  Left Click , on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu and  Left Click  on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR press the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1RedC.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the  Merge into Single Train  option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2RedC.png Context Icon on the Guard Van

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png
Using the  Merge into Single Train  option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


[edit]  Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

    DownUp      
A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.
To open a selected rolling stock object's Context Menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Left Click  its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
PencilTips.PNG You cannot add rolling stock assets to a Scrapbook but you can create and save Consist Assets that have multiple rolling stock objects
Steps: To create a Consist Asset:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the consist -  Double Left Click  on the consist or  Shift  +  Left Click  on individual items
DotPoint2.JPG open the consist Context Menu -  Left Click  on its icon or press the  T  key
DotPoint3.JPG select the option  Save to Consist Asset... 
DotPoint4.JPG enter a name and an optional description for your new Consist Asset and click the Tick.PNG icon
The consist will appear as a Train asset in the  Assets Palette 


Rolling Stock Object Context Menu
ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png


NotePad.PNG You cannot set a Height value for a rolling stock object. It will always take the same height as the track on which it is placed
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock (see Tips above).
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the  Assets Palette  will be painted under the selected objects. The  Tool Options Palette  brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then this option will be greyed out.
NotePad.PNG Objects have a minimum brush size that represents the smallest area that can be painted beneath them using the  Paint Under Selected  option. This minimum area will vary in size between objects but it will be rectangular even for circular objects. If the  Tool Options Palette  brush  Radius  is set to a smaller size then the brush  Radius  will be ignored and the objects minimum brush size will be used instead.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  smooths the height of the ground under the rolling stock object to match its height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new Train asset in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 
 Edit Details  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object. Note: to enter or edit an objects name property use the  Info Palette 


[edit] Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions

Skip Down Skip Up SkipMinorBlank.pngUp Heading    
Two Anchor Points on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line determine the height of an endpoint or an object above the ground.
BlueDot10x10.png the Object Height Anchor, which is normally Black but turns Green when it is selected, controls the height of the object (including spline Endpoints) above the ground. This Anchor point can be moved vertically by the tool pointer using the  Blue  vertical Anchor line
BlueDot10x10.png the Ground Height Anchor, which is Yellow, marks the position of the object on the ground. This Anchor point cannot be moved vertically by the tool pointer but its height can be changed by setting the  Tool Options Palette   Height  value
It is common for both height anchors to be at the same height but there are many situation where the two will be at different heights. The examples below show situations where the two are at different heights and the height of the Object Height Anchor will need to be adjusted.


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Tool Options Palette  and  Info Palette  are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The height of a Rolling Stock Object (locomotive, wagon, etc) CANNOT be altered. These objects are always tied to the height of the track where they have been placed.


FineAdjustSplineHeightUp.png  Object Height Above Ground Height 


Step: To bring the object height down to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag downwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor down to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving the height Anchor point, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the Anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  z  fine adjustment arrows in the  Info Palette  object Pos controls. This can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


FineAdjustSplineHeightDown.png  Object Height Below Ground Height 


Step: To bring the object height up to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag upwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor up to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor

FineAdjustSplineHeightOK.png


; Where this method fails is when the height difference between the two Anchor points exceeds the length of the  Blue  vertical Anchor line so the Ground Height Anchor or the Object Height Anchor is at the very top of the Anchor line. Once it is in that position the Object Height Anchor can no longer be moved up or down because there is no vertical Anchor line to grab.



PencilTips.PNGThe Quick Solution to this problem
Steps: Use the  Settle on Ground  option:-
DotPoint1.JPG open the object or endpont Context Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the option  Settle on Ground . For splines this option will force the spline segment to follow the contours of the ground but it will now be at the same height as the ground


A more complex alternative method is to use the Surveyor Compass Rose, the  Info Palette  and the  Tool Options Palette .

FineAdjustSplineSetFocus.png
The Surveyor Compass Rose
Steps: Use the Compass Rose:-
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click on the terrain at a point which has the height that will be used by the object. This will position the Surveyor Compass Rose and record its data as the Focus
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Info Palette  open the Focus controls by a  Left Click  on the small Right Arrowhead to the left of the Focus label
InfoPaletteFocusUseHeight.png The  Info Palette  stores the positional data, including the Height (the  z  value), of the Compass Rose under the label Focus
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the white Down Arrowhead next to the  z  value and select the menu option  Use Height for Brush . This will transfer the Focus  z  value to the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting
DotPoint4.JPG Open the Context Menu for the object (or spline endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Select the option  Apply Height  or  Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint 


[edit] The Marquee Tool

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  F 
The  Marquee Tool  allows areas of your Trainz World to be selected for Scrapbook and baseboard operations


PalettesIcon S20.png Various function of this tool use the  Scrapbook Palette   Tool Options Palette   Info Palette   Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen when required then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


Marquee Tools
 Tool Targets  The Marquee Tool has no Target options so it has no drop down menu list
This tool has a range of tasks:-
DotPoint.JPG Select objects for moving, deleting and copying into a scrapbook
DotPoint.JPG Add and delete one or multiple baseboards
DotPoint.JPG Set the grid size of one or multiple baseboards
DotPoint.JPG Set the texture and height of an area including multiple baseboards
 Tool Actions  The Marquee Tool has no Action options so it has no drop down menu list


BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Tool draws out a rectangular area, the Marquee Selection Area, on the route. Any objects (including ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers) that are inside the Marquee Selection Area or touched by its boundary will be selected.


Steps: To draw out a Marquee Selection Area:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the Marquee Tool icon S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png or press the  F  key
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click and Drag  over the area to be selected
PencilTips.PNG You can use the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to restrict the objects that will be selected in the Marquee Selection Area. See PageLink.PNG Marquee Assets Filter below for more details


MarqueeSelectArea S20.png

In the image above:-
DotPoint.JPG a road spline at the bottom and a house at the lower left of the Marquee Selection Area have been touched by the drawn rectangle so they have been included in the selection.
DotPoint.JPG the Marquee Selection Area was drawn from the top left to the bottom right which places the Marquee Context Icon MarqueeContextIcon S20.png at the bottom right of the rectangle.
DotPoint.JPG the bottom right of the Marquee Selection Area also has a 3D Anchor Frame.
NotePad.PNG Like the Fine Adjustment Tool, a Marquee Selection Area has a 3D Anchor Frame. The Marquee Anchors are used to move and rotate the objects within the selection area (including ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers) through 3D space
DotPoint.JPG The road spline was the last object that was included in the selection area so its Context Icons are also present.
Shown in the image, but not highlighted, are the Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers that are also included in the Marquee Selection Area.
MarqueeAreaTools S20.png The Marquee Selection Area 3D Anchor Frame has some similarities to the one used with the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint.JPG the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors will move the Marquee and all its contents horizontally in the Anchor direction
DotPoint.JPG the  Blue  vertical Anchor will move the Marquee with all its contents up or down in the Anchor direction
DotPoint.JPG the  Blue  rotational Anchor will rotate the Marquee with all its contents in the direction of the rotation movement
DotPoint.JPG there are no  Green  and  Red  rotational Anchors
DotPoint.JPG at the centre of the 3D Anchor Frame is a Select Area Anchor. Left Click and Drag this Anchor point to move the Marquee with all its contents in any horizontal direction
DotPoint.JPG each of the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors has a resize Anchor, an orange coloured dot, located at its end. Left Click and Drag these Anchor points to resize the Marquee Selection Area (and its contents) in that specific direction. Objects that are in locked layers will not be affected by the resize action


[edit] The Marquee Tool and the Palette Filters

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  can be used to restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool.
FilterPaletteScenerySplinesSelected S20.png
Steps: To restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  set the Filter Action to  Filter Selections 
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Filter Palette  select an Asset Icon or an Asset Type (e.g. Scenery Splines)
DotPoint3.JPG In the  Assets Palette  enter an optional search text in the  Search  box to narrow down the type of object
DotPoint4.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png or press the  F  key
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag out the Marquee Selection Area around the objects to be selected
Only those objects identified in the filtered list will be selected by the Marquee


MarqueeSelectSplines S20.png Using the Filters shown above, the Marquee Selection Area will include:-
DotPoint.JPG all spline objects (excluding tracks) crossed by the selection area. See Note: below
DotPoint.JPG all ground textures
DotPoint.JPG all TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG all ground heights
found within the Marquee Selection Area


NotePad.PNG If a spline segment has one or both of its endpoints outside the Marquee Selection Area but the selection area crosses part of the segment then that segment will be selected


[edit] Marquee Anchor Controls

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Marquee Anchors will move:-
DotPoint.JPG the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will NOT be moved
DotPoint.JPG the ground textures. As shown in two of the images below this will leave the original baseboard ground texture or grid pattern showing
DotPoint.JPG the TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers. If an effect layer is locked then it will not be moved but it will still be deleted from the area that was covered by the original Marquee Selection Area
DotPoint.JPG the ground heights
PencilTips.PNG If you do not want to move everything that is in the Marquee Selection Area then set the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  before using the Marquee Tool to only include those assets that you do want to move


The following images demonstrate the effect of using the Marquee Anchor Controls on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.


 Horizontal Anchor Shift 

  The  Green  Horizontal Anchor Line has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the original image above at the start of this section have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaShift S20.png
 


 Rotational Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Rotational Anchor Arc has been used to rotate the Marquee Selection Area about 45° anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the Marquee Selection Area has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaRotate S20.png
 


 Vertical Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Vertical Anchor Line has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards. Note that the ground height, ground textures and any effect layers within the Marquee Selection Area have also been moved up.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaUplift S20.png
 


[edit] Scrapbook Operations

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png Heading    
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
 But NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
The ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers in the Marquee Selection Area will always be added to the scrapbook. You can use the filters in the  Filter Palette  and  Assets Palette  to control which visible objects in the selection area will also be added
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data types are added to your Trainz World and how they are added.


Once an area has been marked out by the Marquee Tool a number of options become available.

MarqueeEditMenu S20.png
The SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu will show some additional options specifically for the Marquee Tool:-
 Cut  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including the ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. Any scenery objects (excluding ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) that are not in a locked layer will be removed from the Marquee area. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  X  keys
 Copy  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  C  keys
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted into the route at the cursor (focus) point. Which contents will be pasted and how they will be pasted are controlled by the Filters in the  Scrapbook Palette  (see PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Data for more details). This option will always be available with and without a Marquee area being marked if there is a scrapbook available to be pasted. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  V  keys
 Clear  the selected scenery objects that are not in locked layers will be removed from the Marquee area but NOT the selected ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers. This is the same as pressing the  Delete  key
 Select None  the Marquee Selection Area boundary lines are removed from the route cancelling the selection process. Nothing that is inside the area will be removed. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  D  keys


[edit]  Adding a New Scrapbook 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The  Cut  and  Copy  Scrapbook operations are also found in the Marquee Context Menu (see the PageLink.PNG Marquee Context Menu below).


PencilTips.PNGYou don't have to use the Marquee Tool to create a new Scrapbook. You can use the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool to select any number of objects and then press  Ctrl  +  C . The selected objects, along with the ground heights, ground textures, and any TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers, will be copied into a new Scrapbook


When a new Scrapbook is created by a  Cut  (or press  Ctrl  +  X ) or  Copy  (or press  Ctrl  +  C ), it will appear in the Scrapbook palette with some basic details.

ScrapbookNew S20.png
The newly created scrapbook will be given:-
DotPoint.JPG a name consisting of the date and time of its creation
DotPoint.JPG a thumbnail
PencilTips.PNGThe thumbnail image will be taken using the current camera POV (point of view). To get a better image adjust the camera position and view to give the best possible shot of the Scrapbook objects before giving the  Cut  or  Copy  command
DotPoint.JPG a scrapbook number (it will be inserted as the №1 scrapbook)
DotPoint.JPG an expiry date which will be set 5 days after its creation - this will countdown each day until 0 when the new scrapbook will be deleted


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Scrapbooks use very little memory so there is no real limit to how many you can store in the palette but finding the one you want will be more difficult as the list grows longer
DotPoint.JPG Rolling Stock Objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The rolling stock Context Menu option  Save to Consist Asset...  performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock objects and consists
DotPoint.JPG Deleting a Scrapbook after it has been pasted does not delete the objects that it has added to the route


There are two changes that can be made to the new scrapbook:-
DotPoint1RedC.png Give it a name -  Left Click  inside the Name Text Box and type a new name. To set its new name  Left Click  on the image OR press the  Enter  key
DotPoint2RedC.png Make it permanent -  Left Click  the white Pin icon (ScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png) to change it to blue. The scrapbook will no longer expire but it can still be deleted at any time
Pinned scrapbooks are always shown with a blue pin icon ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.png and the words "pinned, no expiry" displayed next to their scrapbook №
PencilTips.PNGThe Pinning of any scrapbook can be reversed so that it will then expire in 5 days time.  Left Click  the blue pin icon.
ScrapbookNewNamedPinned S20.png


Once a scrapbook has been Pinned it becomes an asset and will appear in Content Manager

ScrapbookEntryCM S20.png

The scrapbook can be uploaded to the DLS and saved as a CDP file.

PencilTips.PNGYou can archive your scrapbooks as CDP files to keep the number of installed scrapbooks to a minimum. If an archived scrapbook is needed then you can use the Import Content Files option in Content Manager to add it to the  Scrapbook Palette . It can be deleted from the palette later, when no longer needed.


[edit] Marquee Context Menu

Skip Down Skip Up SkipMinorBlank.pngUp Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Context Menu creates, deletes, converts and paints individual or multiple baseboards. It also creates and pastes scrapbooks.


To open the Context Menu for a Marquee Selection Area  Left Click  on its Context Icon MarqueeContextIcon S20.png or press the  T  key.

Marquee Context Menu
MarqueeContextMenu S20.png
 Cut  removes the objects in the selection area from the route and moves them into the Scrapbook. Ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers will be copied, not cut. Has the same effect as pressing the  Ctrl  +  X  keys
 Copy  copies the objects in the selection area and moves them into the Scrapbook. Has the same effect as pressing the  Ctrl  +  C  keys
 Paste to Selected Area  pastes the objects in the currently selected Scrapbook into the selection area. Which objects are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the settings in the Scrapbook Filter. Has the same effect as pressing the  Ctrl  +  V  keys
 Delete  deletes the objects in the selection area except for the ground heights, textures and effect layers. Has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Within Marquee  if a texture has been selected in the  Assets Palette  then that texture will be painted inside the selection area using the settings in the  Tool Options Palette . If no texture has been selected then this option will be greyed out
 Set Marquee To Brush Height  changes the ground height of the selection area to the brush height in the  Tool Options Palette 
 Convert Baseboards To  converts the grid of the entire baseboard or baseboards covered by the selection area into the grid size selected from the three options -  HD Grid  (in Trainz Plus only),  5m Grid  and  10m Grid . If the selection area covers any empty spaces outside the existing baseboards then NO NEW baseboards will be created in those spaces
 Delete Baseboards in Marquee  deletes the entire baseboard or baseboards covered by the selection area. See Notes: below
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights in the  Assets Palette  the most common ground texture used in the Marquee Selection area
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights in the  Filter Palette  the most common ground texture used in the Marquee Selection area


NotePad.PNG Notes:

 
DotPoint.JPG The  Convert Baseboards To  and  Delete Baseboards in Marquee  options will affect the entire baseboard or baseboards that contain the Marquee Selection Area even if the selection area only covers a small part of a baseboard.
DotPoint.JPG  It is NOT RECOMMENDED that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route. The boundaries between HD and non-HD baseboards will have display issues. If you are going to use the HD Grid then it is recommended that the entire route should be Upgraded to HD Grid. See PageLink.PNG Upgrading a Route to HD below for more details. You can mix both 5m Grid and 10m Grid baseboards in the same route


[edit] Managing Baseboards

Skip Down Skip Up DownSkipMinorBlank.png Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee is a powerful tool for adding, deleting and changing the properties of multiple baseboards


[edit]  Add, Delete, Convert Baseboards 

Marquee drawn area


PencilTips.PNG In Trainz Plus you can Upgrade an existing 5m Grid or 10m Grid route entirely to HD Grid. See PageLink.PNG Upgrading a Route to HD below for more details.
Steps: To add, delete and convert baseboards:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png or press the  F  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag to draw out the Marquee Selection Area area where the new baseboards will be added or the existing baseboards will be deleted or converted.
The Marquee Selection Area, shown with a green border in the image on the left, covers the existing baseboard (black, bottom left) and where 3 new baseboards will be created. The Marquee has a Context Icon as shown in the image.
DotPoint3.JPG  Left Click  on the Context Icon or press the  T  key to open up the Marquee Context Menu (see Marquee Context Menu above).
DotPoint4.JPG Create, Convert, Delete
DotPoint.JPG To Add new baseboards select the context option  Add New Baseboards >  then select a grid size from two or three sub-options,  HD Grid  (in Trainz Plus only),  5m Grid  and  10m Grid . If existing baseboards have also been selected then they will NOT be converted to the new grid size.
NotePad.PNG  It is NOT RECOMMENDED that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route. It should be ALL HD or none. You can mix both 5m Grid and 10m Grid baseboards in the same route but NOT with HD Grid baseboards
DotPoint.JPG To Convert highlighted baseboards to a different Grid Size select the context option  Convert Existing Baseboards To >  then select a grid size from two or three sub-options,  HD Grid  (in Trainz Plus only),  5m Grid  and  10m Grid . If the selection area covers any empty spaces outside the existing baseboards then NO NEW baseboards will be created in those spaces
NotePad.PNG  It is NOT RECOMMENDED that you mix HD Grid baseboards with 10m or 5m Grid baseboards in the same route. It should be ALL HD or none. Mixing 5m Grid and 10m Grid baseboards in a route is OK
DotPoint.JPG To Delete the selected baseboards select the context option  Delete Baseboards in Marquee . Note: An entire baseboard will be deleted even if the selection area only covers a small part of the baseboard. The  Ctrl  +  Z  keys can Undo the deletion.


[edit]  Baseboard Ground Height 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Selection Area can be used to set the height of entire baseboards or just a selected section of one or more baseboards
Steps: To set the height of the baseboards or area under the Marquee Selection Area:-
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  enter the required ground height into the  Height  setting.  Note: the  Grade  setting has no effect when used with the Marquee tool
DotPoint2.JPG In the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png or press the  F  key
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag to draw out the Marquee Selection Area area so that it covers the area that will have its height set. This can include multiple baseboards and empty spaces.  Note: If empty spaces are included in the Marquee Selection Area then new baseboards will be created in those empty spaces 
DotPoint4.JPG  Left Click  on the Context Icon or press the  T  key to open up the Marquee Context Menu (see Marquee Context Menu above).
DotPoint5.JPG select the Context Menu option  Set Marquee to Brush Height . If the Marquee extends over empty space then new baseboards will be created at the set  Height  value.


[edit]  Baseboard Ground Texture 

    DownUp      
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Selection Area can be used to set the ground texture of entire baseboards or just a selected section of one or more baseboards
Steps: To paint the baseboards or area under the Marquee Selection Area with a ground texture:-
DotPoint1.JPG from the  Assets Palette   Left Click  on a ground texture. Selecting a texture will automatically select the S20 BrushToolIcon.png Brush Tool
DotPoint2.JPG in the  Tool Options Palette  set the brush  Scale  setting and any other required controls
DotPoint3.JPG in the  Tools Palette   Left Click  on the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png or press the  F  key
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag to draw out the Marquee Selection Area area so that it covers the area that will be painted with the texture. This can include multiple baseboards and empty spaces.  Note: If empty spaces are included in the Marquee Selection Area then new baseboards will be created in those empty spaces 
DotPoint5.JPG  Left Click  on the Context Icon or press the  T  key to open up the Marquee Context Menu (see Marquee Context Menu above).
DotPoint6.JPG select the Context Menu option  Paint Within Marquee . If the Marquee extends over empty space then new baseboards will be created and covered with the selected ground texture. The new baseboards will be created at the Default altitude for the set Region or at 0m if no region has been set.


[edit] Mass Moves and Clones

Skip Down Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
The S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool and S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool are able to select multiple objects that can then be manipulated as a single object. The objects can be of different Asset Types (e.g. Scenery Meshes and Scenery Splines) and they do not have to be in the same layer.
PencilTips.PNGYou can also use the Marquee Tool to select objects but this will also select the ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers as well as the objects.
The possible manipulations are:-
DotPoint.JPG bulk physical moves - horizontal, vertical and rotations. Objects in Locked layers cannot be moved
DotPoint.JPG cloning or duplication - all the cloned objects will be placed into the current Active Layer


[edit] Selecting Multiple Identical Objects

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
PencilTips.PNG Both the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool and the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool can move and clone (duplicate) single and multiple objects. The Marquee Tool can also move and clone objects but it will include the ground heights, ground textures and any TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers in the cloning and moving operations.


You can quickly select all nearby identical objects by a Double Left Click on an object.


PencilTips.PNGThis also applies to all the wagons in a consist. Double Left Click on any one of them to select all of them - they DO NOT have to be identical wagons.


A forest of many different trees. Only one has been selected. Double Left Click on a tree to select all the identical trees in the forest.
MultipleSelectTip1 S20.png MultipleSelectTip2 S20.png


PencilTips.PNG Shift  + Double Left Click on another object. It and all its identical copies will be added to the selection.


[edit] Selecting and Moving Multiple Objects

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    

Multiple objects can be selected and moved with the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool and the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Mass Moves

The objects DO NOT have to be:-
DotPoint.JPG the same type. They can be a mixture of scenery splines and mesh objects
DotPoint.JPG in the same layers but objects in Locked layers cannot be moved
PencilTips.PNGYou can also use the Marquee Tool to move objects but this will also move the ground heights, ground textures and TurfFX/Clutter Effect Layers as well as objects.


MultipleSelectionGroup S20.png
Steps: To select multiple objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG  Shift  +  Left Click  on every object that is to be included in the selection group


PencilTips.PNGYou can apply the  Height  setting in the  Tool Options Palette  to the entire group of selected objects.
MultipleSelectionGroupMove S20.png
Steps: To move multiple objects:-
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected objects in the required direction
DotPoint4.JPG Release the mouse button when the group of objects are in position


PencilTips.PNGThe Fine Adjustment Tool  Blue  Rotation Anchor can be used to rotate all the members of the group with the last selected object (the one with the Context Icon) as the centre of rotation


[edit] Cloning Objects

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png You can easily clone single and multiple selected objects. If you have selected a group of objects they DO NOT have to be the same type - you can, for example, select scenery objects and scenery splines.


NotePad.PNG Notes: Layers and Cloning

DotPoint.JPG the objects can be in different layers
DotPoint.JPG the layers can be locked and the objects will still be cloned
DotPoint.JPG all the cloned objects will be placed into the current Active Layer which must be Unlocked
For more information on layers see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette at the end of this document.


Steps: To clone an object or a group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Tools Palette  select either the S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Free Move Tool or the S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on a single object or  Shift  +  Left Click  for multiple objects
DotPoint3.JPG  Ctrl  + Left Click and Drag on any of the selected objects
FreeMoveCloneSelect S20.png FreeMoveCloneMoved S20.png


[edit] Bulk Replace Assets Tool (Trainz Plus Only)

  Skip Up Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png This tool is available in Trainz Plus only
BlueDot10x10.png It will replace ALL seleted objects with a single selected replacement asset
BlueDot10x10.png All objects, and its replacement, must be the same Asset Type
BlueDot10x10.png The replacement will occur throughout the entire route


PalettesIcon S20.png This tool uses the  Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette . If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


This tool is only available in Trainz Plus
In TRS22PE use the Surveyor Classic  Bulk Asset Update/Replace  option
DotPoint.JPG More detailed instructions, with examples, on performing a Bulk Asset Replacement in Surveyor 2.0 can be found on the Trainz Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes. Only a summary is provided here
DotPoint.JPG For detailed instructions on using the Surveyor Classic Bulk Asset Replace/Update refer to the Trainz Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Bulk Asset Update/Replace Tool


PencilTips.PNG Before you reach Step  6  below it would be a good idea to either know the exact name of the asset you will be using as the replacement or have it visible in the Surveyor Trainz World View to identify it with the Eyedropper


Steps: To use the Bulk Replace Assets Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG In the  Filter Palette  open the  Filter Toggles  by a  Left Click  on either the small arrowhead on the left of the Enabled box or on the "Enabled" message itself.
 
FilterPaletteClickToggleListOpen S20.png

This will open the  Filter Palette  Toggle List of assets and a separate  Search  text box. The Toggle List list is identical to the list shown in the  Assets Palette  except that each item can be toggled or switched ON or OFF by the check mark on its left.


  FilterPaletteToggleListOpen S20.png

The  Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette  are normally linked so that the list of toggled assets in the Filter Palette is duplicated in the Assets Palette.
If an asset is:-

  • toggled OFF in the Filter Palette it will disappear from the list in the Assets Palette
  • If it is toggled back ON it will reappear in the Assets Palette list


Items in the Toggle List can be selected (highlighted)
DotPoint.JPG To select a single item in the list  Left Click  on its name
DotPoint.JPG To select multiple items in the list use  Shift  +  Left Click  or  Ctrl  +  Left Click 
DotPoint.JPG To select the entire list  Left Click  on one of the asset names then press the  Ctrl  +  A  keys


DotPoint2.JPG Use the  Filter Palette  Asset Type icons or the Drop Down List to select the TYPE of asset to be replaced. Note: All the assets to be replaced must be of the same type (e.g. ALL scenery splines or ALL track objects)


You can bulk replace:-
Tick.PNG GroundTextureFilter S20.png one or more different Ground Textures with a single Ground Texture and NOT with any other type of asset
Tick.PNG SceneryMeshFilter S20.png one or more different Scenery Meshes with a single Scenery Mesh and NOT with any other type of asset. None of the meshes can include track‡
Tick.PNG ScenerySplineFilter S20.png one or more different Scenery Splines with a single Scenery Spline and NOT with any other type of asset. None of the splines can include track‡
Tick.PNG TrackSplineFilter S20.png one or more different Track Splines with a single Track Spline and NOT with any other type of asset. Fixed Track assets are NOT track splines
Tick.PNG TrackMeshFilter S20.png one or more different Track Objects with a single Track Object and NOT with any other type of asset
this includes fixed assets and splines with built-in track (e.g. industries, bridges, tunnels)
You cannot bulk replace:-
Cross.PNG TrainFilter S20.png Rolling Stock (locomotives, wagons)
Cross.PNG PresetFilter S20.png Presets (effect layers)


DotPoint3.JPG Optional: Use the  Filter Palette   Search  text box to narrow down the list
 
DotPoint4.JPG Select (highlight) and toggle ON the assets that will be replaced in the route (the process is summarised in the steps below)
Steps: To toggle ON an asset, or a subset of the assets, shown in the list:-
Clear the Existing Toggles:
DotPoint1Blue.png In the Toggle List select one of the assets such as the asset to be replaced, or the first of a group of assets to be replaced
DotPoint2Blue.png Press  Ctrl  +  A  to highlight them all
DotPoint3Blue.png Left Click on the Toggle icon of any one of the assets to set them all to OFF
Set the New Toggles:
DotPoint4Blue.png To clear all the highlighting and select an asset to be replaced Left Click on the name of the asset
If more then one asset is to be replaced then use  Shift  +  Left Click  and/or  Ctrl  +  Left Click  to highlight the additional assets
DotPoint5Blue.png Left Click on the Toggle icon of the selected asset or on any one of the seleted assets to set them all to ON


DotPoint5.JPG In the  Filter Palette  select the  Filter Disabled  option from the Filter Actions drop down menu
FilterPaletteFilterDisabled S20.png
This will break the connection between the Filter Palette and the Assets Palette and will set the Assets Palette to show  All Content 


DotPoint6.JPG In the  Assets Palette  select the Replacement Asset (only one can be selected and it must be of the same Type as those selected to be replaced)
You can use the Assets Palette  Search  text box to narrow down the list of assets (or use the Eyedropper) but DO NOT use the selection tools (the asset type icons or drop down list) in the Filter Palette


DotPoint7.JPG In the  Assets Palette  filtered list Right Click on the replacement asset to open its menu
 
DotPoint8.JPG Select the last item,  Bulk Replace Filtered Assets 
FilterPaletteBulkReplaceExample 11 S20.png
Stop.PNG WARNING:
The Bulk Replace will occur throughout the ENTIRE route


  With the exception of unusually small or simple routes, a progress bar will be shown. For large routes the replacement process may take a few minutes.
FilterPaletteBulkReplaceExample 12 S20.png

NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Clicking the  Cancel  button will terminate the replacement process at the point shown by the position of the progress bar but some, or many, of the replacements will have already been made.
DotPoint.JPG After termination, or after the replacement process has been completed, pressing the  Ctrl  +  Z  keys will Undo all the replacements


[edit] Upgrading a Route to HD (Trainz Plus Only)

    Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png This option is only available in Trainz Plus
BlueDot10x10.png Upgrading an entire route to HD is recommended over mixing HD Grid and non-HD Grid baseboards in the same route, but there are limitations to upgrading that must be considered beforehand


You can convert (Upgrade) an entire 5m Grid or 10m Grid route to HD Grid in a single step but there are some important limitations. See the Notes: below.
ToolsMenuUpgradeRoute S20.png
Steps: To Upgrade a route to HD:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the SurveyorToolsIcon S20.png Surveyor Tools Menu icon
DotPoint2.JPG  Left Click  on the option  Upgrade Route 
A progress bar will show the status of the conversion process which may take several minutes depending on the size of the route. At the conclusion of the upgrade you will be given a report indicating that the process was successful or it has failed because of errors. See Notes: below.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

There are some important considerations and restrictions that may affect the viability of converting an entire route to HD. They are:-

DotPoint.JPG the HD route, after conversion from a 10m grid, for example, will be at least 5x the file size of the original route. If the original route is already large then this could easily push it over the limit (1GB) for saving as a .cdp file.
DotPoint.JPG HD routes have a limit of 16 different ground textures per baseboard but each baseboard can have a different set of 16 textures. This is a limitation caused by hardware, not software.
DotPoint.JPG If more than 16 textures are identified in a single baseboard then the extra textures will be replaced by one of those already present in that baseboard. The upgrade process will continue as this is not a "fatal error". You will be given the Focus co-ordinates of any affected baseboards so you can inspect them for any noticeable changes
DotPoint.JPG Legacy Water, which was normally painted onto the terrain using a brush, will be converted to a Water Effect Layer which will cover the entire layout. Like any effect layer, it can be easily deleted - see PageLink.PNG Edit Effect Layers for the details


A typical HD Upgrade report would look like:-
HDUpdateError S20.png The report indicates that:-
GreyDot10x10.png Legacy Water was detected and was converted to a Water Effect Layer
RedDotX10x10.png the baseboard at compass co-ordinates x = 73440m, y = 720m
has exceeded the limit of 16 ground textures
GreenDot10x10.png the HD Upgrade was completed successfully


[edit] The Info Palette

Skip Down   Top Next Up   Bottom


PalettesIcon S20.png If the  Info Palette  is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document. Some  Info Palette  functions will also require the  Assets Palette  and the  Tool Options Palette .


This palette can be easily overlooked but it has some very useful features:-
BlueDot10x10.png naming objects
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the "focus" - the position of the cursor
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the position and orientation of objects (it can be used instead of the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool)
BlueDot10x10.png identifying and setting the "home" layer and binding layer of a selected object
BlueDot10x10.png used for locking and unlocking a selected objects layer


The components of the  Info Palette  are identified in the image below.

InfoPalette S20.png
BlueDot10x10.png Every item in the palette can be edited.
BlueDot10x10.png Each of the small arrowhead icons in the palette will open to display more information and controls or a drop down menu of options.


NotePad.PNG
DotPoint.JPG The Asset Name is the name given to the asset by its creator and the name that will appear in the asset list of Content Manager and in the  Assets Palette 
DotPoint.JPG The Object Name is the optional name that you have given the object so that it can be quickly located in the route and/or session. Some objects, such as station name signs, will require an Object Name that will be visible in Surveyor and Driver


[edit] Palette Coordinates

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
NotePad.PNG Notes:

All the positional data and controls in the  Info Palette  are defined in the following ways:-

 x:  is ALWAYS the  North-South  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 y:  is ALWAYS the  East-West  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 z:  is ALWAYS the  Vertical  direction (perpendicular to the compass directions) regardless of how an object has been rolled or tilted

DotPoint.JPG distances are measured in metres from the North-West corner of the first baseboard. If that baseboard is later deleted then distances will still be measured from its original and now "virtual" North-West corner.
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive distances are in the  South  and  East  directions
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative distances are in the  North  and  West  directions
DotPoint.JPG New boards added to the North of the first baseboard will have negative x coordinates and new boards added to the West of the first baseboard will have negative y coordinates.


[edit] Info Settings Menu

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
All the Focus, Position and Rotation settings have control settings and drop down menus that allow values to be transferred to and from other settings and other tools.
Next to each name is a small grey arrowhead.  Left Click  on the arrowhead to open its list of control settings and to access its menus.


InfoPaletteSettingDropMenu1 S20.png

InfoPaletteSettingDropMenu2 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG in the  Info Palette  Right Click inside ANY control setting box
The first time the popup menu is opened it will only show two active options - Paste and Select All.
 Paste  will paste the contents of your Operating System (Windows, MacOS) clipboard into the setting. If data is already present then the new data will be added to it, not replace it
 Select All  will highlight the contents of the selected setting. You can also achieve this with a Left Click and Drag across the contents of the setting
DotPoint2.JPG Right Click inside the same setting box
Once the value in a setting has been selected (highlighted) the popup menu will show all options as active.
 Cut  will copy the contents of the selected setting into your Operating System clipboard. The contents will then be deleted from the setting
 Copy  will copy the contents of the selected setting into your Operating System clipboard without deleting it
 Delete  will delete the contents of the selected setting. You can also achieve this with a Left Click and Drag across the contents and then press the  Delete  key


Next to the z co-ordinate in both the Focus and Position is a small white down arrowhead.  Left Click  on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteFocusMenu S20.png There is only one option in the sub-menu.
 Left Click  on the  Use Height for Brush  option to copy the current z value to the  Tool Options Palette   Height  setting.


[edit] Focus Info and Controls

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Focus shows the current position and height of the Cursor object.

Open up the Focus by a  Left Click  on its arrowhead icon.

InfoPaletteFocus S20.png


The current cursor position is shown in the x:, y: and z: text boxes. These values can be edited to move the cursor to a new position but CARE will be needed.

PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x: or y: value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the cursor will be refocused at a point on the baseboard edge that is the closest to the entered co-ordinates.


PencilTips.PNG If it has not been deleted you can identify the North-West corner of the original (first) baseboard by entering 0 as the Focus  x:  and  y:  co-ordinates


[edit] Asset Name Menu

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png "Asset Name" refers to the name of the asset as displayed in the  Assets Palette  and in Content Manager. This is not the same as the Object Name (see the next section)


You must have an object (or objects) selected for an Asset Name to be shown and for this menu to be available.

InfoPaletteMulti S20.png If more than one object has been selected then the name and position data shown will be for the last selected object. If different objects (with different kuid codes) have been selected then a count of the additional objects will be added. The (+2) shown in the object name in the image on the left indicates that 2 additional different objects are in the group of selected objects.


Next to the Asset Name is a small white Down Arrowhead.  Left Click  on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteMenu S20.png
Asset Name Menu Options
 Copy   NOT WORKING  (a known bug)
 Show Asset Details  opens a new window showing the image and description of the selected object
 List Assets in New Window  opens up Content Manager and lists all the selected objects
 Add to Picklist  adds selected objects to a Picklist
 Remove from Picklist   NOT WORKING  (a known bug)
use this same option found in the Filter Palette or Content Manager instead
 Select in Assets Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Assets Palette 
 Select in Filter Palette  sets the  Filter Palette  to  All Content  and highlights the selected object in the  Filter Palette 


[edit] Object Name

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png "Object Name" refers to the name that you give to an object


You can give any object in your route an identifying name. In some cases a name is vital for AI and session operations, in other cases it will be needed as a display feature - for example: to be shown on a station nameboard. You must have an object (or objects) selected for this option to be available. If more than one object has been selected then only the last object (the one with the Context Icon) will be affected
InfoPaletteObjectName S20.png
Steps: To name (or rename) a selected object:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  inside the Name text entry box
DotPoint2.JPG Enter a name
DotPoint3.JPG Press the  Enter  key


ObjectsUsingSameName.png
There is no ban on two or more objects using the same name


In the image shown on the left there are 4 objects all named Old Orroroo Rd.

This will not cause any problems for scenery objects apart from finding the exact one you want with the Finder Tool ( Ctrl  +  F  keys) as shown in the image on the left - Which of the 4 "Old Orroroo Rd" objects is the one that I need?

Stop.PNG WARNING:
Duplicate names will cause problems for Industries (including passenger enabled stations), Locomotives, Track Marks, Triggers, Switches, Signals, etc that have to be identified to control the operation of a session.
These objects must have unique names


[edit] Position Info and Controls

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the position data to be shown and edited. Open up the position data by a  Left Click  on its Pos: arrowhead icon.

InfoPalettePos S20.png The position of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the x:, y: and z: text boxes. These values can be edited to move the object or objects to a new position but CARE will be needed.


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x: or y: value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the objects will be moved to that position and may vanish from view. The Undo command can be used to reverse the move or the Marquee Tool can be used to add a baseboard under the "floating" objects.


[edit] Rotation Info and Controls

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the rotation data to be shown and edited. Open up the rotation data by a  Left Click  on its Rot: arrowhead icon.

InfoPaletteRot S20.png The rotational orientation of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the r:, p: and y: text boxes (the letters stand for Roll, Pitch and Yaw). These values can be edited to rotate the object or objects in 3D space BUT not all objects can be rotated in certain directions.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If several objects have been selected then the last selected object, the one with the Context Icon, will be the centre of all rotations.
DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will allow rotations. For example, SpeedTree objects can only be rotated using the  y:  value ( r  and  p  entries will be ignored) while Spline objects cannot be rotated at all


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the rotation angle in increments of 1°.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The rotation data and controls are defined in the following ways:-

 r:  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis (which was defined when it was created).
This is the same as the  Red  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 p:  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis PLUS 90°.
This is the same as the  Green  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 y:  ALWAYS rotates in the horizontal plane around the compass Z or Vertical axis regardless of how the object has been rolled or pitched.
This is similar to but NOT exactly the same as the  Blue  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool. The difference will become obvious if the object has had a roll or pitch rotation applied before the yaw rotation
FineAdjust3DFrameSmall S20.png
 Rot:   y:  = East 90° North 180° West 270° South
Original
RotationAxis S20.png
Roll:  r: = 45 
RotationAxisRoll S20.png
Pitch:  p: = 45 
RotationAxisPitch S20.png
Yaw:  y: = 45 
RotationAxisYaw S20.png
  All rotations shown are 45° in the + (anticlockwise) direction
 

DotPoint.JPG Some objects (for example: SpeedTrees) will NOT allow Roll or Pitch rotations
DotPoint.JPG all angles are measured in degrees
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive angles are anticlockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative angles are clockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG angles greater than 360° can be entered but will give the same result as the angle minus 360°. For example: 450° is exactly the same angle as 90° (450°-360°=90°)
DotPoint.JPG clockwise and anti-clockwise angles are complementary. For example: entering -270° (clockwise) will give the same angle as entering +90° (anticlockwise)


[edit] Layer Info and Controls

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
You must have an object (or objects) selected for the layer data to be shown and edited. Open up the layer data by a Left Click on its Layer: arrowhead icon.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the  Info Palette  is best used to show and edit the layer and binding layer assignments of individual selected objects
DotPoint.JPG operations such as creating, deleting, merging, renaming, moving and hiding layers are performed using the  Layers Palette 
DotPoint.JPG layers can be Locked and Unlocked using the  Info Palette  but the  Layers Palette  is often the best choice for these tasks


For a single selected object
InfoPaletteLayer S20.png This will show the:-
DotPoint.JPG current layer assigned to the selected object
DotPoint.JPG its assigned Binding Layer (if any)
DotPoint.JPG the Locked or Unlocked state of the assigned layer
  InfoPaletteLockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Unlocked. Click this button to Lock the layer
  InfoPaletteUnlockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Locked. Click this button to Unlock the layer
  Using this button will also change the Locked or Unlocked padlock icon shown next to the layer name in the  Layers Palette 
AssetsPaletteLockedUnlockedLayers S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Locked Layer cannot be deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG Locked Layers can be deleted, moved and merged with other layers


For multiple selected objects
InfoPaletteLayersMulti S20.png
DotPoint.JPG If multiple objects all from the same layer have been selected then that layer name will be shown in the Layer box
DotPoint.JPG If multiple objects that are not all from the same layer have been selected then no layer name will be shown in the Layer box. Instead both the Layer and the Binding box will be left "blank" as shown in the image on the left


[edit] Assigning Objects to a Different Layer

Skip Down Skip Up   Heading    
BlueDot10x10.png The Active Layer is the layer used by the Placement Tool when objects are added to your Trainz World.


A selected object or group of selected objects can be assigned to a different layer. If multiple objects have been selected then they do not have to all be in the same layer.

InfoPaletteLayerDropBoxList S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the Layer drop down box. The layer containing the object (for a single selected object only) will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the destination layer name from the Drop Down Menu. See Warning below
The layer reassignment will start the instant the destination layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


NotePad.PNG Once a target layer has been selected then the  Select Layer  button, which sets the Active Layer, will become active IF the target layer is not the Active Layer. A  Left Click  on this button will set it as the Active Layer.


PencilTips.PNGYou can also set the Active Layer by selecting its name from the list in the  Layers Palette .


Stop.PNG WARNING:
DotPoint.JPG Setting a layer for an object will move that object to that layer
DotPoint.JPG Setting a layer for multiple objects that are in different layers will move ALL those objects to that layer
DotPoint.JPG If objects are moved from one layer group to another (such as from the Route Layers to the Session Layers) then it will change where those objects are saved (in the Route or in the Session)


Options: To set current layer to the Active Layer:-
Ablue.png If the  Select Layer  button is greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOff S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to the current Active Layer so there is no need to use this option
Bblue.png If it is NOT greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOn S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to a layer that is not the current Active Layer.  Left Click  on the  Select Layer  button to switch the Active Layer to the same layer as the object


[edit] Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer

  Skip Up   Heading   Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png The Binding Layer, or Bound Layer as it is also called, is a tool used in the development of a route or session. It allows you to temporarily assign an object to a second layer while it is still in its original layer. The object will then take on the properties (Locked or Unlocked, Hidden or Visible) of both layers.
Assigned
Layer
Binding
Layer
Object
Status
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked
LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png or LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeOpen S20.png or None LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible
LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeOpen S20.png or LayerEyeClosed S20.png or None LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
In Summary:-
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Locked then the object will be Locked
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Hidden then the object will be Hidden
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Hidden Layer cannot be seen and therefore, cannot be selected, deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG The  Layers Palette  is the ONLY way to create, delete, name and hide layers


Some examples of using the Binding Layer:-
 Example 1: 
The problem: You need to stop an object from being selected so that you can you move other objects on or around it
The solution: Use the  Layers Palette  to create a new empty layer and lock it. Set the Binding Layer of the object to the new locked layer. The object will then be locked so it cannot be selected or moved even though its original layer is unlocked. When the edit has been completed delete the empty locked layer you just created to unlock all its bound objects and remove all their bindings (the objects will not be deleted)
 Example 2: 
The problem: A group of objects (e.g trees) are blocking access to another object.
The solution: Use the  Layers Palette  to create a new empty layer and hide it. Set the Binding Layer of the blocking objects to the new hidden layer. The blocking objects will no longer be visible and cannot be selected even though their original layer is still visible. When the edit has been completed delete the empty hidden layer you just created to make all its bound objects visible and remove all their bindings (the objects will not be deleted)
PencilTips.PNG You can also use the asset filters found in the  Filter Palette  and the  Assets Palette  to lock or hide specific assets or types of assets from selection when you are working in Surveyor. See the section PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search for more details


InfoPaletteBindingDropBox S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned binding layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG  Left Click  on the Binding drop down box. For a single selected object only the binding layer (which may be <none>) will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the Binding layer name from the Drop Down Menu. Note: the objects assigned layer will not appear in the list because an object cannot be bound to its own layer
The layer reassignment will start the instant the layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


NotePad.PNG Also see PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search for an alternative method of selecting difficult to access objects.


As an example, the image below shows what you will see for a single object that has had:-
InfoPaletteLayerSetBindingSet S20.png
DotPoint.JPG its assigned layer changed (in the example from "route-layer" to "Station Industries")
DotPoint.JPG its binding layer set (in the example to "Multi Industries")
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is Locked so you have the option to Unlock it
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is not the Active Layer so you have the option to Select Layer and make it the Active Layer


LinkWiki.PNG

More information on creating, editing and using Layers can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Use Layers


  Skip Up Top Next Up    


[edit] Trainz Wiki

TrainzWiki.png

More Tutorials and Guides to Using Trainz

LinkWiki.PNG

Related Links


This page was created by Trainz user pware in January 2023 and was last updated as shown below.


Personal tools